Ac200 Manual v1 0

Contents
Chapter 1 Overview………………………………………………………………... 1
1.1 Safety requirement and cautions………………………………………... 1
1.2 Technical criterion ………………………………………………………… 3
Chapter 2 Before Use……………………………………………………………….. 8
2.1 Purchase inspection……………………………………………………….. 8
2.2 Nameplate …………………………………………………………………... 8
2.3 Inverter rated output current…................... … ……………………… 9
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring………………………………………………10
3.1 Safety Precautions………………………………………………………10
3.2 Treatment for inverter after longtime store ……………………………11
3.3 Inverter stable running environment……………………………………...11
3.4 EMI Protection……………………………………………………………... 12
3.5 Machinery installation…………………………………………………….15
3.6 Electric installation………………………………………………………….23
Chapter 4 Basic Operation and Trial Run……………………………………..34
4.1 Safety Precautions…………………………………………………….……34
4.2 Keyboard layout and functions specification……………………………..35
4.3 Basic operation……………………………………………………………37
4.4 Trial run……………………………………………………………………...41
Chapter 5 Fault Diagnoses and Processing…………………………………..54
5.1 Fault types…………………………………………………………………. 54
5.2 Fault information and details ……………………………………………... 54
5.3 Fault diagnoses process …………………………………………………59
Chapter 6 Periodic Overhaul and Maintenance……………………………….64
6.1 Safety Precautions………………………………………………………64
6.2 Overhaul……………………………………………………………………64
6.3 Maintenance………………………………………………………………...66
Chapter 7 Peripheral Equipments and Options………………………………. 69
7.1 Safety Precautions………………………………………………………... 69
7.2 Peripheral equipments…………………………………………………... 69
7.3 The use of peripheral equipments ……………………………………….71
Chapter 8 Quality Guarantee…………………………………………………….. 74
8.1 Guarantee time and range……………………………………………..74
8.2 Liability exemption ……………………………………………………...74
8.3 Product application ……………………………………………………...74
Chapter 9 Function Parameter Specification...................................................... 75
9.1 Basic parameters............................................................................................75
9.2 Operation control parameter.........................................................................82
9.3 Switch value terminal parameters................................................................ 90
9.4 Analog terminal parameters....................................................................... 108
9.5 Keyboard and display parameters.............................................................116
9.6 Motor parameters........................................................................................... 122
9.7 VC control parameter.....................................................................................126
9.8 Torque control parameters........................................................................... 129
9.9 V/F control parameters.................................................................................. 131
9.10 Malfunction and protection parameters.................................................... 136
9.11 PID parameters............................................................................................ 144
9.11 Multi-speed、PLC function and swing frequency parameters..............149
9.13 Communication control function parameters........................................... 154
9.14 Machine malfunction code table................................................................ 158
Chapter 10 Appendix............................................................................................... 162
10.1 Appendix 1: Function parameter table......................................................162
10.2 Appendix 2: Modbus communication protocol.........................................210
10.3 Appendix 3: PG card manual..................................................................... 217
10.4 Appendix 4: Profibus-DP card manual..................................................... 225
10.5 Appendix 5: LCD keyboard.........................................................................228
10.6 Appendix 6: CAN card manual...................................................................232
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL OVERVIEW
Chapter 1 Overview
Thanks for using AC200 high-performance VC frequency inverter produced by Veichi electric
co.,ltd. This manual tells you how to use it perfectly. Please read this manual carefully and fully
understand the safety requirement and cautions before use (installation, wiring, operation, maintain,
checking, and etc...).
1.1 Safety requirement and cautions
Pls do totally understand this part before using the inverter.
Warning signs and meanings
This manual has used belowing signs that mean there is an important part of security. While
observing against the rules, there is danger of injury even death or machine system damage.
Danger: Wrong operation may cause death or large accident.
Warning: Wrong operation may cause death or large accident.
Caution: Wrong operation may cause minor wound.
Important: Wrong operation may cause the inverter and other machine
system damage
Warning signs position Warning 1
Warning2
Drawing 1：Warning positions on crust of AC200 series inverter

Operation requirement
Only Professional trained person are allowed to operate the equipment such as installation, wiring,
running, maintain and etc. “Professional trained person”in this manual means the workers on this
1
product must experience professional skill train, must be familiar with installation, wiring, running
and maintain and can rightly deal with emergency cases in use.
Safety guidance
Safety regulations and warning signs come for your security. They are measures to prevent the
operator and machine system from damage. Pls carefylly read this manual before using and strictly
observe the refulations and warning signs while operating. Safety regulations and warning signs
are classified into: routine regulation, transport and store regulation, installation and wiring
regulation, running regulation, maintenance regulation, dismantlement and disposal regulation.
● Routine regulation
● This product carries dangerous voltage and controls driver machine with
potential danger. If you don’t abide by the regulations or requirements in this
manual, there is danger of body injury even death and machine system
damage.
● Only qualified personnels are allowed to operate the equipment.this product.
Before using, the operator must be familiar with all safety specifications and
operation regulations in this manual. Safe and stable work of the product is
based on right operation and maintenance.
● Do not wire while the power is connected. Otherwise, there is danger of death
for electric shock. Before wiring, inspection, maintenance, please cut power
supply of all related equipments and ensure mains DC voltage in safe range.
And please operate it after 5 mins.
● Away from children and public.
● Only used in application fields as maker stated. No use in equipments related
to special fields such as emergency, succor, ship, medical treatment, aviation,
nuclear and etc.
● Unauthorized alteration or use of accessories which are not sold or
recommended by the maker may cause faults.
● Please make sure this manual is in the final user’ hand before using.
●Before installation and debugging please carefully read and totally understand
these safety regulation and warning signs.
● Transport and store regulation
●Correct transport, store, installation and careful operation an maintenance are

important for inverter safe operation.
● In transport and store process, make sure the inverter is free from impact and
vibration. It must be stored where is dry without corrosive air and conductive
dust, and the temperature must be lower than 60℃.
● Installation and wiring regulation
● Only professional trained person can operate it.
● Power wire, motor wire and control wire should be all connected firmly. Earth
must be reliable and earth resistance must be lower than 10Ω.
● Before opening the inverter, please disconnect all related equipment power
supply and make sure the mains DC voltage is in safe range and operate
after 5mins.
● Human body electrostatic will damage inner sensitive components seriously.
Before operation, please follow ESD measures. Otherwise, there is danger of
2
iverter damage.
● Inverter output voltage is pulse wave. If components such as capacitor which
improves power factor and pressure-sensitive resistance for anti-thunder and
so on are installed at the output side, please dismantle them or change to
input side.
● No switch components such as breaker and contactor at the output side. (If
there must be one, please make sure the output current is 0 while the switch
acting).
● The power supply cable and motor cable specifications must satisfy all
conditions in table 3-7 3-8 .
● Run regulation
● Inverter runs at high voltage. So dangerous voltage is in some components
inevitably.
● No matter where the fault is, there is danger of serious accident, even human
body injury what means dangerous malfunction possibility. So there must be
additional external prevent measures or other safety devices, such as
independent current limiting switch, machinery fense and so on.
● Maintenance regulation
● Only Veichi Electric co., ltd service department or its authorized service
center or professional person trained and authorized by Veichi can maintain
the products. They should be very familiar with the safety warning and
operation gist in this manual.
● Any defective components must be changed in time.
● Before opening the inverter to repair please cut power supply of all related
equipments and ensure mains DC voltage in safe range. And please do
operation after 5 mins.
● Dismantlement and disposal regulation
● Packing case can be reused. Please keep them and reuse or send back to
maker.
● Dismantled metal components are retractable and can be reused.
● Some components such as electrolytic capacitor are harmful to environment.
Please dispose according to environmental protection departments.
1.2 Technical criterion

Items Criterion
Single phase 220V 50/60Hz

Voltage,frequency Three phase 380V 50/60Hz Three phase 220V 50/60Hz
Three phase 660V 50/60Hz Three phase 1140V 50/60Hz
Power
input Voltage:320V～440V; voltage unbalance rate:<3%;
Allowable fluctuations
Frequency:±5% aberration rate: as IEC61800-2 required
Inrush current Lower than rated current
3
Power factor ≥0.94(with DC reactor)

Efficiency ≥96%
Output under rated condition:3 phase, 0 ～ input voltage,

Output voltage
inaccuracy<5%
Output frequency G type:0-320Hz
Output range
Output frequency
Max frequency ±0.5%
accuracy
G type:150% rated current/1 min, 180% rated current/10s, 200%
Overload capacity
rated current/0.5s
Motor control mode V/F without PG ,VC without PG, V/F with PG,VC with PG
Modulate mode Optimized SVPWM mode

Carrier frequency 0.7～16.0kHz
VC without PG: rated load 1:100
Speed range
VC with PG: rated load 1:1000
Main Steady speed VC without PG: ≤2% rated synchronized speed

Control accuracy VC with PG: ≤0.05% rated synchronized speed
performan VC without PG: when 0.5Hz, 150% rated torque
Starting torque
ce VC with PG: when 0Hz, 200% rated torque
VC without PG: ≤20ms
Torque response
VC with PG: ≤10ms
Digit setting:max frequency×±0.01%
Frequency accuracy
Analog setting:max frequency×±0.2%
Digit setting:0.01Hz
Frequency resolution
Analog setting:max frequency×0.05%
Starting frequency:0.00～50.00Hz
DC braking capacity Braking time:0.0～60.0s
Braking current:0.0～150.0% rated current
Torque upgrade Auto torque upgrade 0.0%～100.0%
capacity Manual torque upgrade 0.0%～30.0%
4 modes: one linearity torque characteristic curve ,one user set
V/F curve V/F curve mode, one drop torque characteristic curve (1.1- 2.0
powers)、and square V/F curve mode.
Basic
functions 2 modes: One linear Acceleration/Deceleration and two S curve
Acceleration/Deceler
Acceleration/Deceleration.4 sets of Acceleration/Deceleration
ation curve
time ,unit 0.01s selectable, longest time: 650.00s.
Rely on power supply voltage compensate function, while motor

Rated output voltage rated voltage is 100%, set it at the range of 50-100%(output can
not over input voltage).
While power supply voltage fluctuates,it can auto-keep constant
Voltage auto-adjust
output voltage.
4
Auto energy-saving According to load situation, auto-optimize output voltage to save

running energy.
Auto-limit the current while running to prevent over current break
Auto-limit current
trouble.
Instant power off While instant power off, realize continual operation by bus voltage
treatment control.
PID control, speed track, power off restart, jump frequency,

Standard functions upper/lower frequency limit control, program operation, multi-
speed, RS485, analog output, frequency impulse output.
Keyboard digital set, keyboard potentionmeter, analog voltage

terminal VS, analog voltage/current terminal AI,analog current
Frequency set
terminal AS, communication given and multi channels terminal
channels
selection, master-slave channels combination,expansion card,
switch by various ways
Feedback input Voltage terminal VS, voltage/current terminal AI ,current terminal
channel AS, communication given, pulse input PUL.
Running command Operation panel given, external terminal given, communication
channel given,expansion card given
Start, stop, FOR/REV, JOG, multi-step speed, free stop, reset,
Input command
Acceleration/Deceleration time selection, frequency set channel
signal
selection, exterior fault alarm.
Two relay output, one collector output,one AO output: 0～10V
Exterior output signal output or 4～20mA output,another AO output: 0～10V output or
4～20mA output or frequency pulse output.
Over-voltage, under-voltage, current limit, over-current,
Protection function overload, electric thermal relay, overheat, over-voltage stall, data
protection,rapid protection,input/output loss phase protection
Single file 5 digital tube Can monitor one state variable
LED display display
Two file 5 digital tube Can monitor two state variables
display
Can upload or download function code information of inverter to
Parameter copy
realize fast parameter copy.
Keyboard Output frequency, given frequency, output current, input voltage,
display State monitor output voltage, motor speed, PID feedback, PID given value,
module temperature etc monitor parameters..
Over-voltage, under-voltage, over-current, short circuit, open
Fault alarm phase, overload, overheat, over-voltage speed lost, current limit,
or data protection is destroyed; Fault running state; Fault history.
Indoor,altitude ≤ 1000m,above 1000m down the rated amount,

Environmen each increase of 100m down the rated amount of 1%;no
Install place
t condensation,ice,rain,snow,hail;solar radiation below 700W/ ㎡ ,
air pressure 70-106 kPa
5
-10 ～ +50℃，above 40℃ down the rated amount,the maximum

Temperature,
temperature :60℃(no load running),
humidity
5%—95%RH(no condensation)
Vibration Under 20Hz≤0.5g
Store temperature -30—+60℃
Installation Hanging type, cabinet type
Protection degree IP20
Cooling mode Forced cooling
Table 1-1: Technical criterion
6
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL BEFORE USE
Chapter 2 Before Use

2.1 Purchase Inspection
On receiving your order, please check the package and confirm intact before opening, and check if
there’s any damage, scratch or dirt (damages caused during transportation are not within the
company's warranty). If there’s any damage caused during transportation, please contact us or the
transport company immediately.
After confirming the receipt of the goods intact, please re-confirm if the product and your order are
consistent. Model of the product is on the "MODEL" column. If you find the product model is not the
one you ordered, please contact the dealer you purchased the product or the sales department of
VEICHI immediately.
2.2 Nameplate
Nameplate Position and Content
Inverter Model
Power Level
Input
Output
Series No.
Drawing2-1：AC200 Series Inverter Nameplate Position

Model Specification
8
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL BEFORE USE
Drawing 2-2：Meaning and Naming Rules of AC200 Series Inverter Nameplate
2.3 Inverter Rated Output Current

Input Voltage 220V 380V 660V 1140V
Rated Power Rated Output Current (A)
0.4 2.5
0.75 4 2.3
1.5 7 3.7
2.2 10 5.0
4 16 10
5.5 20 13
7.5 30 17 10
11 42 25 15
15 55 32 18
18.5 70 38 22
22 80 45 28
30 110 60 35
37 130 75 45 25
45 160 90 52 31
55 200 110 63 38
75 260 150 86 52
90 320 180 98 58
110 380 210 121 75
132 420 250 150 86
160 550 310 175 105
185 600 340 198 115
200 660 380 218 132
220 720 415 235 144
250 470 270 162
280 510 330 175
315 600 345 208
355 670 380 220
400 750 430 260
450 810 466 270
500 860 540 325
560 990 600 365
630 1100 680 400
9
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.1 Safety Precautions
This section specifies the various considerations necessary for reliable and safe operation of the
product by users.
Inverter
●When the inverter is installed in closed cabinet, please ensure the
temperature at the air-in port below 40℃ by way of cooling fans or air
conditioners and other cooling equipment to ensure the safe and reliable
operation of the inverter.
●When installing, please cover the inverter with cloth or paper to prevent metal
dust, oil, water and others. And remove these cover carefully after working.
● Please follow the ESD regulations when operating the inverter, otherwise,
the inverter may be damaged.
●If several inverters are installed in a cabinet, enough space must be set aside
on the upper part of the inverter in order to change the cooling fan.
●Inverter can’t work over rated range. Otherwise, the inverter may be
damaged.
●When transporting the inverter, please hold the case firmly. There might be
danger of inverter main body falling, personnel injury or inverter damage if
only holding the pre-cover.
Motor
●Different motor has different max allowable running speed. Motor can’t run
over the max allowable running speed.
●When inverter is running at low speed, the motor auto-cooling effect would
seriously decrease. If motor runs at low speed for long term, it will be
damaged for overheating. If needed, please use special motor for inverter.
●When constant speed machinery runs at inconstant speed, there might be
sympathetic vibration. Please install vibration-proof rubber under motor rack
or use jumping frequency control function.
●When using frequency inverter or working frequency power supply to drive,
the torque characteristics are different. Please do confirm the torque
characteristic of the equipment connected.
●The rated current of shift gear motor is different from that of standard motor.
Please confirm and choose the right frequency inverter. Moreover, please do
switch the pole when the inverter input current is 0. Otherwise, it may bring
inverter damage.
●When the wiring distance between motor and inverter is far, the max torque of
the motor would reduce due to voltage drop. So please use cable thick
enough when the distance between the motor and the inverter is long.
10
3.2 Dealing Methods for Inverter after Long-term Storage

If the inverter storage time is over one year, the aluminum capacitor in the inverter must be
pre-charged again and make sure the aluminum capacitor characteristic recovered before
installation. For specific method, please follow the grads in the chart below and give more than 30
mins corresponding proportional voltage for every grad when the inverter is no-load.
If the input voltage of one grad is at the critical point of contactor, fan or other equipments, please
increase or reduce the corresponding input voltage for the grad to avoid any related components
working under critical state.
Chart 3-1: Dealing Methods for Inverter after Long-term Storage

3.3 Stable Running Environment for Inverter
Installation environment is very important to maximize the performance of this product and
maintain long-term function, so please install the product in the environment as required in the
following chart.
Environment Requirement
Installation site Indoor without direct sunshine
Operating
-10 ～ +50℃
temperature
Storage
-30 ～ +60℃
temperature
Environment <95%RH, no condensation
humidity
Please install the inverter in place as follows:
● Place without oil mist, corrosive gases, flammable gas, dust, etc.
● Place where metal dust, oil, water would not get inside the inverter (please do
not install inverter on flammable material such as wood, etc).
Surroundings
● Place without radioactive material or flammable material.
● Place without poisonous gases or liquid.
● Place with little salt corrosion.
● Place without direct sunshine.
Altitude <1000m ,above 1000m down the rated amount
Vibration 9～200Hz:5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
11
● Inverter must be installed vertically and longitudinally, and it can’t be installed

horizontally.
Installation and ● Please independently install high heating equipments such as braking
cooling resistor and it can’t be installed in the same cabinet with inverter. Installation
of high heating equipments at the air-in port of the inverter is strictly
prohibited.
Chart 3-1:AC200 Series Inverter Running Environment Condition
●To improve product reliability, please use the inverter where temperature would not change
suddenly; when using in a closed cabinet, cooling fan or air conditioning for cooling is needed to
prevent the internal temperature from exceeding allowed temperature; please avoid freezing of
the inverter since low temperatures may cause malfunction of some devices due to freezing.
● Derate according to the chart when temperature exceeds limit.
PERM IT O UTPUT CURRENT(% )
100
75
50
25
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 TEM PERATURE(℃)
Chart 3-2:AC200 Series Inverter Derating Curve When Exceeding Permitted Temperature
● Derate according to the chart when altitude exceeds limit.
PERMIT OUTPUT CURRENT(%)
100
80
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 ALTITUDE(M ）
Chart 3-3:AC200 Series Inverter Derating Curve When Exceeding Permitted Altitude
3.4 EMI Protection
The designing features of inverter allow it to run with strong electromagnetic interference.
Generally, if the quality of the installation is good, the safe and trouble-free operation of the inverter
can be guaranteed. Please implement installation according to the following rules to ensure reliable
and effective installation of inverters and avoiding electromagnetic interference.
● Make sure that all equipments in the cabinet have been connected reliably to the public Y-type
earth point or earth bus with thick and short cable. The motor earth should be as close as
possible. Please do not connect the motor shell to earth terminal of the inverter or the protective
area of control system.
● Make sure that all devices connected to the inverter are connected to the same earth net or
Y-type earth point with thick and short cable.
● It would be better for conductors to be flat and multi-core since they have lower impedance at
high frequencies.
● When cutting off the tip, the cable should be as neat as possible to make sure that the
12
unscreened wires are as short as possible.

● Wiring of control cable should be away from the power supply cable and motor cable as far as
possible; separate trunk should be used and a 90º vertical cross must be used when the supply
power cable and the motor cable intersect.
● Make sure that the contactor should be installed in a cabinet with a surge suppressor.
Alternatively, the AC contactor coil is connected with 'R-C' damping circuit, using a coil voltage
corresponding varistor; the DC contactor coil is connected with 'flywheel' diodes or pressure
thermistor type devices corresponding to the coil voltage, which is particularly important when
the contactor frequently operates and when contactor is controlled by the output relay of the
inverter.
● Cable connected to motor should be shielded cable or armored cable. The two barriers are
earthed reliably by cable earthing card.
● Installation of 'Input Noise Filter' can reduce electromagnetic interference from other devices of
the grid side, 'Input Noise Filter' must be as close to the inverter input terminals, at the same
time, the filter must earth reliably as the inverter.
● Installation 'output side noise filter' can reduce interference from radio interference and induction
noise. 'Output side noise filter' must be as close to the inverter output terminals, at the same
time, the filter must earth reliably as the inverter.
● Control circuit cable should be shielded cables all the time;
● Adding zero phase reactor in power supply wire near inverter input terminal, adding zero phase
reactor in the motor wire near inverter output terminal and adding zero phase reactor in control
wire near inverter control terminal to efficiently reduce electromagnetic interference to the
inverter.
● Earth
Right and reliable earth is the basic condition of safe and reliable running of the product. For right
earth, please read the following notice carefully.
●To avoid electric shock, earth cable should be the size as specified in
the technical standards for electrical equipment. And cable length
should be as short as possible. Otherwise, leakage current of inverter
would cause unstable potential of the earth terminal which is far from
the earth point, and electric shock accident would happen frequently.
● Be sure to ground the ground terminal. Grounding resistance 10Ω or
less, it may cause injury or death
●Earth terminal must be earth. Earth resistance must be below 10Ω.
Otherwise, there is danger of injury and death.
●Please do not share earth cable with welder or other big current/pulse
power equipment. Otherwise, inverter would act abnormally.
●When multi inverters are used at the same time, please do not wind
the earth wire to loop-type. Otherwise, inverter will act abnormally.
13
Chart 3-4: Multi AC200 Series Inverters United Earth
Chart 3-5：AC200 Series Inverter System Earth

Note: motor must earth as close as possible. Motor shell can’t be connected to the inner earth
terminal of the inverter and it can’t share the earth net with the control system either.
●Power cable, motor cable, control cable of inverter
Shielding layer (reticulate/armored) should be winded reliably by cable earth card and then fixed to
inverter earth piece by bolt. Please refer to the following chart.
Chart 3-6：Cable Earth Card for Cable Earth

● Correspondence between inverter and motor cable length and carrier frequency
When wiring distance between inverter and motor is long (especially low-frequency output), cable
voltage drop will cause the motor torque reduction. Moreover, high-frequency leakage current will
increase, thereby causing an increase of inverter output current, which would cause the inverter
over current trip. And the current detection accuracy and running stability would be seriously
affected. Please refer to the cable length in the following table to adjust the carrier frequency. When
14
system requires the wiring distance to be more than 100m, please adopt distributed capacity
reduce measure (Such as “no metal conductor covers cable”, “wire each phase cable apart” and so
on)
Cable length <20m 20~50m 50~100m >100m
Carrier frequency 0.7~16kHz 0.7~8kHz 0.7~4kHz 0.7~2kHz
Chart 3-2：Correspondence between Inverter and Motor Cable Length and Carrier Frequency
3.5 Machinery Installation

Installation Notice and Related Requirement
● AC200 inverter components
Chart 3-7：AC200 Series Inverter Components

● Installation Direction
To prevent reduction of inverter cooling effect, please do install the inverter longitudinally-mounted.
Chart 3-8：AC200 Series Inverter Installation Direction

● Installation Space
Single machine installation: to ensure enough ventilation and wiring space for inverter cooling,
please follow installation conditions as follows. The back of the inverter should stick to the wall so
that the surrounding air of radiator can flow freely to ensure the cooling effect.
15
Chart 3-9：Single AC200 Series Inverter Installation Space

Multi inverters paratactic installation: when installing multi inverters in cabinet, please ensure
installation space as required below.
Chart 3-10: Multi AC200 Series Inverters Paratactic Installation Space Requirement
Overall Dimension of Inverter and Keyboard
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
INSTALLATI
MODEL W W1 H H1 D D1 ON
APERTURE
16
AC200-S2-R40G
AC200-S2-R75G 122 112 182 171 154.5 145 ф5
AC200-S2-1R5G
AC200-S2-2R2G 159 147.2 246 236 157.5 148 ф5.5
AC200-T3-R75G
AC200-T3-1R5G 122 112 182 171 154.5 145 ф5
AC200-T3-2R2G
AC200-T3-004G
159 147.2 246 236 157.5 148 ф5.5
AC200-T3-5R5G
AC200-T3-7R5G
195 179 291 275 167.5 158 ф7
AC200-T3-011G
AC200-T3-015G
AC200-T3-018G 230 208 330 315 200 190 ф7
AC200T3-022G
Instillation INSTALLATI
Overall Dimension
MODEL Position ON
W H D H2 W1 H1 APERTURE
AC200-T3-030G 255 410 225 370 180 395 Ф7

AC200-T3-037G 305 570 260 522 180 550 Ф9
17
AC200-T3-045G
AC200-T3-055G
AC200-T3-075G
AC200-T3-090G 380 620 290 564 240 595 ф11
AC200-T3-110G
W
W1
D
H1
H2
H
Overall Dimension
MODEL Position ON
W H D H2 W1 H1 APERTURE
AC200-T3-132G 500 780 340 708 350 755 ф11
AC200-T3-160G
AC200-T3-185G 650 1060 400 950 400 1023 ф16
AC200-T3-200G
AC200-T3-220G
AC200-T3-250G 750 1170 400 1050 460 1128 ф18
AC200-T3-280G
AC200-T3-315G
AC200-T3-355G 850 1280 450 1150 550 1236 ф20
AC200-T3-400G
Notice: No DC Reactor Inside
18
W D
H1
H
D1
W1
Overall Dimension
MODEL Position ON
W H D H1 W1 D1 APERTURE
AC200-T3-160GD
AC200-T3-185GD 650 1600 400 1500 492 332 ф14
AC200-T3-200GD
AC200-T3-220GD
AC200-T3-250GD 750 1700 400 1600 582 332 ф14
AC200-T3-280GD
AC200-T3-315GD
AC200-T3-355GD 850 1800 450 1700 622 382 ф14
AC200-T3-400GD
Notice: DC Reactor Inside
19
W D
H1
H
W1
D1
Instillation INSTALLAT
Overall Dimension
MODEL Position ION
W H D H1 W1 D1 APERTURE
AC200-T3-450G
AC200-T3-500G 1200 1850 550 1750 960 466 ф14
AC200-T3-560G
Chart 3-3：AC200 Series Inverter Overall Dimension
20
Keyboard Shape and Mouth Dimension
Chart 3-11:AC200 Series Inverter Single Line LED Keyboard Overall Dimension
59,5
54,5
M outh keyboard with box M outh keyboard withoutbox
104,5 84,5
Chart 3-12:AC200 Series Inverter Mouth Dimension for Single Line LED Keyboard Case
16.5 63.5
35.6
114.5
110.5
17.1
53.75
65.5 19.5
Chart 3-13: AC200 Series Inverter Double Line LED Keyboard Overall Dimension
21
111
M outh keyboard with box M outh keyboard with box M outh keyboard withoutbox
119
T3-160G /185P T3-015G /018P
to to
142
T3-560G /630P T3-132G /160P
64
70
75
Chart 3-14: AC200 Series Inverter Mouth Dimension for Double Line LED Keyboard Case
Note: LCD and LED keyboard overall dimensions and the opening dimensions are fully
compatible.
Installation and Dismantlement of Tail-hood
Installation: First the tail-hood upwardly inclines around 15

degree and then inserts the top fixed flat into the fixed hole in
the front cover. Then slightly press the tail-hood downward.
When you hear "Ka", it means that the tail-hood is installed
in place.
Chart 3-15:AC200 Series Inverter Tail-hood Installation
Dismantlement: At the tail of the frequency inverter, there’s a

special dismantlement hole design. Put your finger through the
hole, upwardly pull the cover slightly until the buckle between
the tail-hood and the crust tear off, and then remove the
tail-hood.
Chart 3-16:AC200 Series Inverter Tail-hood Dismantlement
22
Installation and Dismantlement of keyboard
Chart 3-17:AC200 Series Inverter Keyboard Installation and Dismantlement
3.6 Electrical Installation

To ensure safe, reliable and rational use of this product, please fully understand the safety
precautions described in this manual before using.
Safety Precautions
● Inverter must earth reliably when running. Otherwise there is danger of
casualty and unstable inverter performance.
● To ensure safety running, only trained personnel can do installation and
wiring job.
● No operation under power connected state. Otherwise there might be
danger of electric shock even death.
● Please turn off the power of all related equipment, and make sure the
main circuit DC voltage has dropped to a safe level, and wait five
minutes before any relevant job.
●The wiring of control cables, power cables and motor connection cables
must be isolated from each other and do not put them in the same cable
though or cable racks.
● The device can only be used as specified by the manufacturer, Please
consult Veichi when using in special case.
● No insulation tests for the inverter or the related cable by HV insulation
test equipment.
● If the inverter or the peripheral equipment (filer, reactor and etc) needs
insulation test, firstly 500V meter should be used to test the insulation
resistance, which should not be lower than 4MΩ.
23
Standard Connection Diagram

● Standard Connection Diagram
brake module
R brake DC reactor
resistor
notice 1
short
circuit
circuit
breaker
connector input reactor output reactor
(-) (+) (+) PB (+) P1
R R U U
AC input S S V V M
~
T T W W
shielded cables
notice 2
inverter (near inverter groud )
+24V E
PLC (ground resistor low
COM than 10 Ω )
AC220V max output
(forward running) X1 TA1 3A/240VAC
5A/30VDC
input terminals
(reversal running) X2 TB1
passive terminal output

(forward jog running) X3 TC1
AC220V AC0V
(reversal jog running) X4
TA2
(free stop) X5
TB2
(fault reset) X6
TC2
(none) X7
PUL AC0V
COM
+24V
open collector output

A+
RS485 communication 120Ω
Y
B- K7
COM shielded twisted pair
notice：default settings in bracket K8
notice：cable(near inverter ground)
1 +24Vmax output:DC24V/100mA
notice 4 2 Y max output:DC24V/50mA
input pulse X7
frequency reference input
PUL 10
J1
K5 _
mA
J2 20
analog
0
shielded twisted pair line) J3 K6

+ -
current model analog input A02

+10V
（0~20mA)/（4~20mA) GND
output monitor
shielded twisted pair cable
voltage model analog input AS
5
（0~5V)/（0~10V) _
VS V
10
0
current/voltage analog input K1

K3
AI K2 + -
K4
A01
GND
GND
notice：1.+10V terminals max input 50mA
2 VS/AIterminal resistor:75KΩ notice：A01/A02 used as frequency or
3 AS terminal resistor:250Ω voltage output，max current 2mA
notice：1 stand for main circuit terminal

2 stand for control circuit terminal
Chart 3-18：AC200 Series Inverter Standard Connection Diagram

Note: 1.When installing DC reactor, make sure to dismantle the short connector between
terminal P1 and（+）.
2.NPN or PNP transistor signal can be selected as input of multi-function input terminal
（X1~X7/PUL）. Inverter built-in power supply (+24V terminal) or external power supply
(PLC terminal) can be chosen as bias voltage. Factory setting ‘+24V’ short connect with
‘PLC’.
3. Analog monitor output is the special output for meters such as frequency meter, current
meter and voltage meter. It can’t be used for control operations such as feedback control.
4. As there are multi pulse styles, please refer to the line connect mode description details.
24
● Auxiliary Terminal Output Capacity
Terminal Function Definition Max Output

10V auxiliary power supply output,
+10V 50mA
constitutes loop with GND.
Analog monitor output, constitutes loop Max output 2mA as frequency,
A01/A02
with GND. voltage signal,
24V auxiliary power supply output,
+24V 100mA
constitutes loop with COM.
Collector open circuit output; can set the
Y DC24V/50mA
action-object by program.
TA1/TB1/T 3A/240VAC
C1 Passive connector output; can set the 5A/30VDC
TA2/TB2/T action-object by program.
C2
Chart 3-4：AC200 Series Inverter Auxiliary Terminals Output Capacity
●Connection Function Specification of Switch Terminals
AS VS AI +10V GND A+ B- Y +24V PLC COM TA1 TB1 TC1

AO2 AO1 GND COM X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7/PUL TA2 TB2 TC2
Switch Selecting
Function Specification
Treminal Position
K1 AO1:0～20mA or 4～20mA current output
S1
K2 AO1:0～10V voltage output
K3 AI:0～20mA or 4～20mA input current
S2
K4 AI: 0～10V input voltage
K5 AO2: 0.0～100kHz (J1 on), open collector circuit output
S3
K6 AO2:0.0～100kHz (J1 on), active source output
K7 RS485: connect with 120Ω terminal resistor
S4
K8 RS485:connect without 120Ω terminal resistor
S5 J1 AO2:0.0～100kHz frequency output
25
J2 AO2:0～20mA or 4～20mA current output

J3 0～10V voltage output
+24V Short +24V terminal and PLC terminal
S6 PLC PLC terminal receiving external power input, detailed in Drawing
COM 3-22，3-23
Short PLC terminal and COM terminal
K9 Disconnect GND terminal and PE discharge loop
S7
K10 Connect GND terminal and PE discharge loop
Chart 3-5：AC200 Series Inverter Switch Terminal Connection Function Specification

Main Circuit Terminals
● Main circuit terminals array and definition
Arrangement sequence of main circuit terminal with 18.5kW or less power(15 ~ 18.5KW for steel
cover machine)
(-)(+) PB R S T U V W E
Arrangement sequence of main circuit terminal with 15-22KW(15~22KW for plastic cover machine）
Arrangement sequence of main circuit terminal with 22~30KW (standard machine without PB
terminal）（22KW for steel cover machine）
Arrangement sequence of main circuit terminal with 37~110kW
26
Arrangement sequence of main circuit terminal with 132kW： Arrangement sequence of main circuit
terminal with 160~560kW
Terminal Name Function Definition

Symbol
(-) DC power output, (-) means DC bus cathode, (+)
DC power terminal means DC bus anode, used for external braking
(+) unit.
(+) Braking resistance Used for external braking resistance to realize quick
PB terminal stop.
P1
DC reactor terminal Used for external DC reactor.
(+)
R
S Inverter input terminal Used to connect 3-phase AC power supply.
T
U
V Inverter output terminal Used to connect the motor.
W
Earth Earth terminal, earth resistance<10Ω

E
Chart 3-6:AC200 Series Inverter Main Circuit Terminals Array and Definition
● 3-phase 380V Machine Main Circuit Wiring
Suggested
Main Circuit Terminals Suggested Fixed Copper-core Cable
Model
Screw Specifications Moment (N·m) Specification mm2
(AWG)
AC200-T3-R75G M4 1.2～1.5 1.5mm2(14)
AC200-T3-1R5G M4 1.2～1.5 2.5mm2(12)
AC200-T3-2R2G M4 1.2～1.5 2.5mm2(12)
AC200-T3-004G M4 1.2～1.5 4mm2(10)
AC200-T3-5R5G M4 1.2～1.5 6mm2(9)
AC200-T3-7R5G M5 2～2.5 6mm2(9)
AC200-T3-011G M5 2～2.5 10mm2(7)
AC200-T3-015G M6 4～6 10mm2(7)
AC200-T3-018G M6 4～6 16mm2(5)
AC200-T3-022G M8 8～10 16mm2(5)
AC200-T3-030G M8 8～10 25mm2(3)
AC200-T3-037G M8 8～10 25mm2(3)
AC200-T3-045G M8 8～10 35mm2(2)
27
AC200-T3-055G M10 11～13 35mm2(2)

AC200-T3-075G M10 11～13 50mm2(1)
AC200-T3-090G M10 11～13 50mm2(1/0)
AC200-T3-110G M10 11～13 70mm2(2/0)
AC200-T3-132G M10 11～13 95mm2(3/0)
AC200-T3-160G M12 14～16 95mm2(4/0)
AC200-T3-185G M12 14～16 120mm2
AC200-T3-200G M12 14～16 150mm2
AC200-T3-220G M12 14～16 150mm2
AC200-T3-250G M12 14～16 185mm2
AC200-T3-280G M12 14～16 185mm2
AC200-T3-315G M16 20～23 240mm2
AC200-T3-355G M16 20～23 240mm2
AC200-T3-400G M16 20～23 300mm2
AC200-T3-450G M16 20～23 400mm2
AC200-T3-500G M16 20～23 400mm2
AC200-T3-560G M16 20～23 500mm2
Note: Here we suggest using copper joins for mains electric connectors for machine over 185KW.
Please refer to diagram above for the cut section area.
。
Chart 3-7: Suggested Cable Diameter and Fixed Moment of 3-phase 380V Machine Main
Circuit
● Single-phase 220V Machine Main Circuit Wiring
Main Circuit Suggested Copper-core
Suggested Fixed
Model Terminals Screw Cable Specification mm2
Moment (N·m)
Specifications (AWG)
AC200-S2-R40G M4 1.2～1.5 1.5mm2(14)
AC200-S2-R75G M4 1.2～1.5 2.5mm2(12)
AC200-S2-1R5G M4 1.2～1.5 2.5mm2(12)
AC200-S2-2R2G M4 1.2～1.5 4mm2(10)
Chart 3-8: Suggested Cable Diameter and Fixed Moment Single-phase 220V Machine Main
Circuit
● Suggested Main Circuit Components Specification
Contactor Breaker DC Output
Model Specificatio Input Filter
Specificatio Reactor Filter
n n
AC200-T3-R75G 10A 10A ------ NFI-005 NFO-010
AC200-T3-1R5G 10A 10A ------ NFI-005 NFO-010
AC200-T3-2R2G 16A 15A ------ NFI-010 NFO-010
AC200-T3-004G 16A 20A ------ NFI-010 NFO-010
AC200-T3-5R5G 25A 20A ------ NFI-020 NFO-020
AC200-T3-7R5G 25A 30A ------ NFI-020 NFO-020
28
AC200-T3-011G 32A 40A ------ NFI-036 NFO-036

AC200-T3-015G 40A 50A ------ NFI-036 NFO-036
AC200-T3-018G 50A 60A ------ NFI-050 NFO-050
AC200-T3-022G 50A 75A ------ NFI-050 NFO-050
AC200-T3-030G 63A 100A DCL-80 NFI-080 NFO-080
AC200-T3-315G 630A 1200A DCL-800 ------ ------
AC200-T3-355G 800A 1400A DCL-800 ------ ------
AC200-T3-400G 1000A 1600A DCL-1000 ------ ------
AC200-T3-450G 1000A 2000A DCL-1000 ------ ------
AC200-T3-500G 1000A 2000A DCL-1200 ------ ------
AC200-T3-560G ------ 2000A DCL-1200 ------ ------
Note: For specification details and circuit mode of DC reactor, input filter, output filter and other
components, please refer to Chapter 7 “Peripheral Equipments and Options”.
Chart 3-9: Suggested Mains Fittings for 3-phase 380V Machine
Control Loop Terminals
● Control Loop Terminals Array:
29
AS VS AI +10V GND A+ B- Y +24V PLC COM TA1 TB1 TC1

AO2 AO1 GND COM X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7/PUL TA2 TB2 TC2
Catego Terminal
Name Function Definition
ry Symbol
Supply +10V power, max output current: 50
mA ,usually used for potentiometer supply,
+10V-GND +10V power supply
resistance of potentiometer range: 1KΩ～
5KΩ
Supply +24V power, usually used for digital
+24V-COM +24V power supply input/output terminals and external sensors,
max output current:100 mA
Power
Connect with +24V terminal by factory
default.
When using external signal to drive
PLC Public terminal X1-X7/PUL,PLC must be connected with
external power, and be disconnected with
+24V terminal (detailed in Drawing 3-22,
3-23)
1.input current range: DC 0mA～20mA
AS-GND Current analog input
2.input impedance: 500Ω
1.input voltage range: DC 0V～10V
VS-GND Voltage analog input
2.input impedance: 75 KΩ
Analog
1.input range: DC 0V～10V/0mA～20mA，
input
decided by switch S2(detailed in Drawing
Voltage or current
AI-GND 3-5)
analog input
2.voltage input impedance: 75 KΩ
3.current input impedance: 500Ω
Multi-function digital
X1-PLC
input 1
X2-PLC Optocoupler，compatible with bipolar input.
Digital input 2
1.input resistor:4.4 KΩ
input Multi-function digital
X3-PLC 2.Voltage range when level input:10～30V
input 3
X4-PLC
input 4
30
X5-PLC
input 5
X6-PLC
input 6
Besides the characters of X1～X6,can also
be the high speed impulse input channel.
1.Optocoupler，compatible with bipolar
X7/PUL-PLC input 7/High speed
input,the max input frequency：100KHZ
impulse input
2.Input resistor :1.5KΩ
3.Impulse input level range：10～30V
Selecting slide switch S1 determine the
voltage or current output(See chart3-5)
AO1-GND Analog output 1
1.Output voltage range:DC 0V～10V
2.Output current range:DC 0mA～20mA
Selecting slide switch S5 determine the
voltage/current/high speed impulse
Analog output(See chart 3-5)
output 1.Output voltage range:DC 0V～10V
AO2-GND Analog output 2
3.Impulse output range:0～100kHz
When impulse output,set [F3.53] ”00” digit
= 3.Selecting slide switch S5 determine
active pulse or open collector output(See
chart 3-5)
Optocoupler，open collector output
Digital
Y-COM Digital output1 1.Output voltage range:DC 0V～30V
output
Normally open terminal
TA1-TC1
1
Normally closed
TB1-TC1 Contactor drive capability：
Relay terminal 1
240VAC，3A
output Normally open terminal
TA2-TC2 30VDC，5A
2
Normally closed
TB2-TC2
terminal 2
Communication
Commu A+ RS485 communication interface.
terminal A+
nication Selecting slide switch S4 determine RS485
Communication
terminal B- communication terminal resistor 120 Ω
terminal B-
Chart 3-10：AC200 Series Inverter Control Loop Terminals Array and Definition
● Control Loop Terminal Wiring Specification
Bolt Fixed Cable

Terminal Specification Moment specification Cable Type
(mm) (N·m) (mm2)
31
Twisted-pair
A+ B- M2.5 0.4～0.6 0.75
shielded cable
+10V GND A01 Twisted-pair
M2.5 0.4～0.6 0.75
A02 AS VS AI shielded cable
+24V COM Y TA1
TB1 TC1 TA2 TB2
M2.5 0.4～0.6 0.75 Shielded cable
TC2 PLC X1 X2 X3
X4 X5 X6 X7/PUL
Chart 3-11：Control Loop Terminal Wiring Specification
Braking Unit (Braking Resistance) Connection
● Brake resistance wiring of machine with 18.5KW or less power（15KW-18.5KW for steel cover
machine）
Brakeing
resistor
(-) (+) PB R S T U V W E
Fig 3-19: AC200 Series Frequency Inverter Brake resistance wiring of machine with
18.5KW or less power
● Brake resistance wiring of machine with 15-22KW（for plastic cover machine）
Brakeing
resistor
Fig 3-20: AC200 Series Frequency Inverter Brake resistance wiring of machine with 15-22KW（for plastic
cover machine）
● Brake resistance wiring of machine with 22KW and 30KW(built-in brake is optional)（22KW for
steel cover machine）
32
R S T (+) PB (-) U V W
POWER INPUT MOTOR OUTPUT
Brakeing
resistor
Fig 3-21: AC200 Series Frequency Inverter Brake resistance wiring of machine with 22KW
and 30KW(built-in brake is optional)（22KW for steel cover machine）
● Brake resistance wiring of machine with 37KW or above
Dynamic Brake Unit
POWER ACTIVE
R S T (+) PB (-) U V W
POWER INPUT MOTOR OUTPUT Brakeing
resistor
- + + PB
Fig 3-22: AC200 Series Frequency Inverter Brake resistance wiring of machine with
37KW or above
● Suggested braking resistance specification parameters
The braking resistance value and resistance power in the chart below are in accordance with the
general inertia of the load and intermittent braking mode, In large inertia and long braking frequent
occasions, adjust resistance value and power according to the inverter specification and the rated
parameter of braking unit. If any problem, please consult customer service department of
Shenzhen Veichi Electric Co., Ltd.
Three-phase 380V
Motor power(kW) Resistance Resistance Power(kW) Braking Moment (%)
0.75 kW value(Ω)
750Ω 150W 100%
1.5 kW 400Ω 300W 100%
2.2 kW 250Ω 400W 100%
4.0 kW 150Ω 500W 100%
5.5 kW 100Ω 600W 100%
7.5 kW 75Ω 780W 100%
11 kW 50Ω 1,200W 100%
33
15 kW 40Ω 1,500W 100%

18.5 kW 32Ω 2,000W 100%
22 kW 32Ω 2,000W 100%
30 kW 24Ω 3,000W 100%
37 kW 20Ω 3,700W 100%
45 kW 16Ω 4,500W 100%
55 kW 13Ω 5,500W 100%
75 kW 9Ω 7,500W 100%
90 kW 6.8Ω 9,300W 100%
110 kW 6.2Ω 11,000W 100%
132 kW 4.7Ω 13,000W 100%
160 kW 3.9Ω 15,000W 100%
185 kW 3.3Ω 17,000W 100%
200 kW 3Ω 18,500W 100%
220 kW 2.7Ω 20,000W 100%
250 kW 2.4Ω 22,500W 100%
280 kW 2Ω 25,500W 100%
315 kW 1.8Ω 30,000W 100%
355 kW 1.5Ω 33,000W 100%
400 kW 1.2Ω 42,000W 100%
450 kW 1.2Ω 42,000W 100%
500 kW 1Ω 42,000W 100%
560 kW 1Ω 50,000W 100%
Single-phase 220V
Motor power(kW) Resistance Resistance power(kW) Braking moment (%)
0.4 kW value(Ω)
400Ω 100W 100%
0.75 kW 200Ω 120W 100%
1.5 kW 100Ω 300W 100%
2.2 kW 75Ω 300W 100%
Chart 3-12: Suggested Braking Resistance Specification Parameters of AC200 Series
Inverter
● Build-in braking unit max braking performance
Braking unit of AC200 series product with low power can be selected according to the suggested
braking resistance specification parameters in chart 3-11. In large inertia or long time frequent
braking occasion, the moment should be increased. The max braking power is stated in the
following chart and the range of which can’t be exceeded in use. Otherwise the equipment may be
damaged. If any problem, please consult customer service department of Shenzhen Veichi Electric
34
Co., Ltd.
Three-phase380V
Inverter Model Motor Power Max Braking Current Min Resistance
AC200-T3-R75G 0.75 kW 3.5A 200Ω
AC200-T3-1R5G 1.5 kW 3.5A 200Ω
AC200-T3-2R2G 2.2 kW 7A 100Ω
AC200-T3-004G 4 kW 10A 75Ω
AC200-T3-5R5G 5.5 KW 10A 75Ω
AC200-T3-7R5G 7.5 kW 14A 50Ω
AC200-T3-011G 11 kW 17A 40Ω
AC200-T3-015G 15 kW 23A 30Ω
AC200-T3-018G 18.5 kW 28A 25Ω
AC200-T3-022G 22 kW 28A 25Ω
Single-phase 220V
Inverter Model Motor Power Max Braking Current Min Resistance
AC200-S2-R40G 0.4 kW 3.8A 100Ω
AC200-S2-R75G 0.75 kW 3.8A 100Ω
AC200-S2-1R5G 1.5 kW 6.5A 60Ω
AC200-S2-2R2G 2.2 kW 10.5A 40Ω
Chart 3-13:AC200 Series Inverter Build-in Braking Unit Max Braking Power
35
Multi-functional Contact Input Connection

● NPN transistor connection mode
Use inner 24V power inverter Use innner 24V power inverter
+24V +24V exterior 24V power +24V +24V
PLC PLC
(factory shortconnect) PLC PLC
COM - + CO M
X1 X1
X2 X2
X3 X3
X4 X4
exterior
control
X5 exterior
control
X5
signal signal
X6 X6
X7 X7
PUL PUL
CO M CO M
shielded cable E shielded cable E
Note：Disconnect'+24V'with'PLC'when using exterior power
Chart 3-23: NPN Transistor Digital Input Signal Connection Mode

● PNP transistor connection mode
Use inner 24V power Use inner 24V power
inverter inverter
+24V +24V use exterior 24 power +24V +24V
PLC PLC
PLC PLC
CO M CO M
+ -
CO M CO M
X1 X1
X2 X2
exterior X3 exterior X3
control control
signal signal
X4 X4
X5 X5
X6 X6
X7 X7
PUL PUL
shielded cable E shielded cable E
Chart 3-24: PNP Transistor Digital Input Signal Connection Mode

Digital output signal connection
inverter inverter
+24V +24V
winding winding
+
Y1 Y1
-
shielded twisted exterior24V power

paircable
CO M CO M
CO M shield twisted paircable

E CO M E
controlexteriorrChart
elay using 3-25:AC200
inner24 power Series Inverter Digital Output
controlexter Signal
iorrelay using Connection
exterior24V power Mode
36
Analog Output Signal Connection

AO 1 term inaluse as 0~10V outputindicator AO 1term inaluse as 0~20m A outputindicator
5 10
inverter inverter
_
V _
mA
K1 K1
20
10
0
0
K2 K2
+ - + -
AO 1 AO 2
G ND G ND
shielded tw isted paircable shielded tw isted paircable
E E
AO 2 term inaluse as 0~10V outputindicator AO 2 term inaluse as 0~20m A outputindicator
5 10
inverter inverter
_
V _
mA
J1 J1
20
10
0
0
J2 J2
J3 + - J3 + -
AO 2 AO 2
G ND G ND
E E
AO 2 term inaluse as 0.2~50kHz active source pulse output AO 2 term inaluse as 0.2~50kHz open collectorcircuitpulse output
25
exteriorpow er 25
inverter inverter + -
kHz kHz
J1 J1
50
50
0
0
bias resistor
K5 J2 K5
J2
J3 K6 + - J3 K6 + -
AO 2 AO 2
G ND G ND
E E
Chart 3-26:AC200 Series Inverter Analog Output Signal Connection Mode

Connection of Pulse Input Signal
connection ofpassive source pulse signalinput connection ofactive source pulse signalinput
inverter inverter
+24V +24V
pulse signalsource pulse signalsource
PLC PLC
CO M CO M
X7 X7
PUL PUL
PUL PUL
CO M CO M CO M CO M
E E
shielded twisted pairsource shielded twisted pairsource
Chart 3-27: Pulse Input Signal Connection Mode of AC200 Series Inverter
37
Standby Control System

Frequency inverter is composed of semiconductor, passive electronic component and driving part.
And these devices have working life even under normal working conditions and these devices may
also have characteristic variation or failure. These characteristics change or failure would inevitably
lead to failure of the product. Setting standby control system when using the inverter is highly
recommended to prevent lost production caused by product failure.
Figure 3-28 is the standby control system for manual switch converting to direct driving motor of
power supply when inverter fails. Standby control systems such as power supply Y/Δ step-down
start way driving motor, power supply self-coupling reduction voltage start mode driving motor,
power supply soft start mode driving motor or standby inverter system can be chose to use
according to the actual needs and environment.
Figure 3-28: Standby Control System of Power Supply Direct Driving Mode
38
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL BASIC OPERATION AND TRIAL RUN
Chapter 4 Basic Operation and Trial Run

● No wiring while power supply is connected.Otherwise there is danger of
electric shock.
● No operation while the cover is open.Otherwise, there is danger of electric
shock.
● Please ensure reliable earth. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock
and fire.
● Before wiring please cut power supply of all related equipments and
ensure main DC voltage in safe range. And please do operation after 5
mins.
● Only professional trained person is allowed to operate this product.
● Please do not dismantle the inverter cover while it is electrified. Otherwise,
there is danger of electric shock.
● Please do not touch the printed circuit board of the inverter while it is
electrified. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock.
● Please ensure reliable mains cable connection. If the mains cable is loose,
thereis danger of fire caused by joint overheat.
● Before electrifying, please check the power voltage again. Wrong power
voltage can cause fault or damage the inverter, even cause fire.
● Please do not install inverter on flammable material or attach flammable
material to the inverter. Before electrifying, please clear the surroundings.
● While operation, please follow the ESD regulations. Otherwise, the
inverter maybe damaged.
● Please don’t cut the power directly while the inverter drives the motor
running. The power can’t be cut until the motor totally stop. Otherwise, the
● Please don’t cut or connect motor while the inverter drives the motor
running. The motor can’t be cut or connect until the inverter output is 0.
Otherwise, the inverter maybe damaged.
Important ● Control cable should be twisted-pair shielded cable. The barrier should be
connected to the inverter earth terminal reliably to prevent the inverter
from abnormal working.
● Unprofessional person can not operate, install, wiring, debug and
maintain.
● Change, dismantle or maintain without permission may cause inverter
damage. This case is not in our quality assurance range.
34
4.2 Keyboard layout and functions specification

● Keyboard appearance
● Key function
Key Name Function
Enter menu while standby or running. Press this key to

Menu key return while modify parameter. While standby or running,
press for 1 sec to enter condition monitoring interface.
Press to modify parameter while in menu interface.Press
Confirm/modif
again to confirm after modifying. While standby or running,
y key
press to change LED monitoring items at stop.
Select parameter group in menu interface. Modify parameter
while in modify interface. Modify given frequency，PID while
Up/down key at standby or condition monitoring state（While given
frequency, PID are set by keyboard and [F4.09]）
Select digit of function no modified by up/down key；Select

Shift key
parameter digits modified in parameter modify state.
While run/stop is controlled by keyboard, press this key, the

Forward run
inverter forward rotate and the indicator is always on. While
key
reverse, the indicator sparks.
This key function can be defined by parameter [F4.07].
Jog/reverse Press it, machine reverses and indicator is off if this key is
key defined as REVERSE. Machine will jog and indicator is on if
this key is defined as JOG.
Machine stops if press it while run/stop is controlled by
Stop/reset keyboard. Its efficiency range is defined via function no
key [F4.08]. Inverter resets if press it in fault state (no reset if
fault is not solved).
Keyboard Can be used as input channel for given frequency, upper
potentionmet frequency limit, given torque, given PID or PID feedback
er setting.
35
● Indicator light meanings
Name State Meaning

Hz Spark/On Indicate the frequency unit.
A On Indicate the current unit.
Unit indicator V Spark/On Indicate the voltage unit.

light S On Indicate the time unit.
RPM On Indicate the speed unit.
% Spark/On Indicate the percentage unit.
FWD On Inverter is forward rotating.
State
FWD Spark Inverter is reverse rotating.
indicator light
FWD Off Inverter stops.
Function REV/JOG On Jog.

indicator light REV/JOG Off Reverse.
Chart 4-1: Indicator light meanings
● Number and character table
Chart 4-2：Number and character table

● LCD keyboard operation is similar to LED keyboard operation.Please refer to LED
keyboard operation instruction.
● Basic LED operation
It displays frequency 50.00Hz when stop. Here F0.09=100.00 setting will be taken as an example
to explain the basic LED operation.
36
Chart 4-1: Basic LED operation

4.3 Basic operation
● Parameter initialization
After setting F0.19=1，parameter initialization is finished. Operation details as follows:
Chart 4-2: Parameter initialization

● Core control mode selections
Nine core control mode selections：
Asynchronous motor control mode:
0: V/F control
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: High-performance VC without PG
4: High-performance VC with PG
Synchronous motor control mode:
5:Reserved
6: High-performance VC without PG
7: VC with PG
Other control:
8:Voltage frequency differential output
Here we set F0.00=0（V/F control）as an example to introduce it
37
Chart 4-3: Core control mode selections
● Run command instructions

Four run command channels: 0: keyboard control, 1: terminal control,
2:RS485 communication control, 3: optional card. It can be set by F0.02.
Here we set F0.02=1(terminal control) as an example:
Chart 4-4: Run command instructions

It introducs terminal control two-wire 1, which is one kind of terminal control mode. For the other
control modes, please refer the chapter 9.
● Frequency command instructions
There are many kinds of requency command instruction selections. Please refer to chapter 9 for
details. Here we set F0.03=1(keyboard potentionmeter give frequency) as an example:
Chart 4-5: Frequency command instructions

● Start-up mode selections
Three start-up modes: 0: direct start-up, 1: braking firstly, then start by start-up frequency, 2: speed
track and start-up. Here we set F1.00=2(Speed tracking, judge direction then start ) as an example:
Chart 4-6: Start-up mode selections

● Stop mode selections
38
Two stop modes: 0: deceleration stop, 1: free stop, Here we set F1.10=1(free stop) as an example:
Chart 4-7: Stop mode selections

● Acceleration/deceleration time selections
There are 4 groups of acc/dec time. If no note, it is acc/dec time 1. Take setting F0.14=8.0（acc/dec
time 1）as example:
Chart 4-8: Acceleration/deceleration time selections

● Motor parameter setting
Set [F5.02] (motor rated power), [F5.03] (motor rated frequency), [F5.04] (motor rated speed),
[F5.05] (motor rated voltage) according to the motor nameplate. Other parameter setting can be
got by inverter self-study.
Please refer to the following operation mode chart:
Chart 4-9: Motor parameter setting

● Parameter copy function selection
39
Set F4.05=1, send inverter parameter to keyboard and save:
Chart 4-10: Send inverter parameter to keyboard and save
Set F4.05=2, send keyboard parameter to inverter:
Chart 4-11: Send keyboard parameter to inverter and save
● Run monitoring setting
Chart 4-12: Run monitoring setting
40
4．4 Trial run

● Trial run debugging guide
Start
Check power machine wiring
Set F5.01-F5.06 according to the motor

.
nameplate and wiring
PressJOG/REV to jog run
Check the direction,if wrong,change wire

；or set F0.16 to change the direction
No Yes
Whether the motor
load can break off
Static self-study，change F5.20=2 Rotate self-study，change F5.20=1

Press FWD,wait for self-study stop Press FWD,wait for self-study stop
V/F control mode Select V/F control VC control mode

or VC control mode
Set F0.00=0 to select Set F0.00=3 to select

V/Fcontrol mode VC control mode
Set run frequency

giving channel
F0.03=0
Set run frequency

F0.08
Set run command giving channel F0.02=0
Press FWD to run
Press STOP/RESET to stop
Trial run stop
Chart 4-13: Trial run
41
● Parameter self-tuning seletion

Motor parameter self-tuning
start
check inverterpowerwire connection,check wire connection

between inverterand m otor,electrify
setnum berofm otorpoles F5.01 according to

nam eplate
set m otorrated powerF5.02 according to

nam eplate
set m otorrated frequency F5.03 according to

nam eplate
set m otorrated speed F5.04 according to

nam eplate
set m otorrated votage F5.05 according to

nam eplate
set m otorrated currentF5.06 according to

nam eplate
yes no
load break offtest
set F5.12=1,rated self-study,press set F5.12=2,static self-study,

SET to enterself-tuning waitting state press SET to g waitting state
press FW D to startself-tuning
yes
self-tuning failture, faultalarm
no param eterrenew
detectfaultcause,clear
faultang try again no
self-tuning finished,param eter

F5.07-F5.11 renewed
over
Chart 4-14: Parameter self-tuning selections
42
● Frequency giving flow

=0
number giving
F0.03 frequency
=1 giving channel A
potentiometer giving Upper frequency F0.11
channels calculation synthesize
=2
Terminal VS giving
Terminal AI giving
=3
F0.06 f≤f3
channel A frequency f1 Output frequency f
=4 f1 =0
Analog AS giving
f2 =1
=5
Terminal PUL giving f
=6 f1+f2 =2
RS485 communication
giving f1-f2 =3
=7
UP/DOWN control F0.04 frequency
max{f1.f2} =4
viving channel B f＞f3
PID control giving
=8 Output frequency f3
min{f1.f2}=5
=9
PLC control giving
=10 Channel B frequency f2

Option card
=11
Multi-speed giving
Chart 4-15: Frequency giving flow
● Start/stop control flow
43
F direct start
constant speed
set frequency
start frequency accelerate
F1.00
F1.02
=0
T
=1 F1.03
=2
F braking and start frequency start
constant speed
set frequency
start frequency accelerate

Output frequency
constant speed run
F1.02
start
F1.04 T
F1.05 DC baaking F1.03
start frequency hold time

run command
stop
speed track restart
FA.08
decel eatel energy
stop baaking
F1.07
=0
=1
F
constant speed
set
terminal function 44 frequency constant speed
stop output
Xi open DC baaking
start frequency braking current
（Xi=X0~X7）
connect F1.08 F1.09
terminal function 6 T
F1.10 F1.11
Xi open braking waiting time braking time
（Xi=X0~X7）
connect
free stop
Chart 4-16: Start/stop control flow
44
● VC control without PG
Start
If change motor or electrify for the first

time, please self-tuning according to
chart 4-14
Set F0.00=3 ,choose VC control mode
Set given frequency according to chart4-15
Set F0.02,choose command given channel
Set start-stop control according to chart 4-16
Set maximum output torqueF6.08,according to system requiement
Trail run
No
Whether control perfor-
mance reaches requirement
Adjust F6 parameters to optimize

Yes control performance and to improve
output torque/speed accuracy
Over
Chart 4-17: VC control without PG
45
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL FAULT DIAGNOSES AND PROCESSING
Chapter 5 Fault Diagnoses and Processing

This chapter explains the display content and process of the inverter fault, alarm and operation
fault. It also simply explains the bad situation caused by inverter or motor fault and how to solve it.
For the adjustment guide in trial run, please refer to this chapter too.
5.1 Fault types
Type Inverter action while fault happens
While inverter detect fault, the state likes this:

● Keyboard display character showing fault content.
● Inverter stops output. Motor free slide stops.
● While function F2.45 is set as 3(output fault), Y terminal output valid
open-collector digital output.
Equipment fault
● While function F2.46/F2.47 is 3(fault output), TA1-TC1, TA2-TC2
terminals output closed passive digital output,TB1-TC1, TB2-TC2
terminals output open passive digital output.
● While there is fault as OL, OC, SC, OV, UL2, if FA.37 is not 0, the inverter
will restart automatically after FA.38 setting time.
In certain application occasions, external related equipments fault signals

are considered in the inverter control system as usage of monitoring,
External fault
protection or switch control. At this time, if one multi function terminal is
defied as “external fault”, the inverter stops output alarm signal.
5.2 Fault information and details
Keyboard Fault
Fault type Possible causes Treatment
display code
● Power supply is too ● Check input power,
Too low low eliminate fault.
L.U.1
while stop ● Voltage detection ● Seek support from factory.
circuit is abnormal
● Power supply is too
low
● Power capacitance is ● Check input input power,
Too low too small, or there is eliminate fault.
E.LU2 voltage in big impact current in ● Improve power-supply
run the power grid. system.
● Inner DC main ● Seek support from factory.
contactor is not
closed.
● Detect power voltage and
Acc ● Power voltage eliminate fault.
E.oU1 over-voltag fluctuation over limit. ● Restart motor until it
e ● Start running motor. totally stop.Set F1.00 as
1or 2.
54
● Prolong deceleration time

● Deceleration time is properly.
too short. ● Reduce load inertia or
Dec
● Load potential energy improve inverter
E.oU2 over-voltag
or inertia is too large. capacitance or add
e
● Power voltage braking unit.
fluctuation over limit. ● Detect input power and
clear fault.
Constant ● Detect input power
speed ● Power voltage voltage and eliminate
E.oU3
over- fluctuation over limit. fault.
voltage ● Install input reactor.
Over-voltag ● Check input power,
● Power voltage
E.oU4 e while eliminate fault.
fluctuation over limit.
stop ● Seek support from factory.
● Acceleration time is ● Prolong acc time.
too short. ● Restart motor until it
● Start running motor. totally
Acc
● V/F curve setting is stop.Set F1.00 as 1or 2.
E.oC1 over-curren
not suitable.Or torque ● Reset V/F curve or torque
t
boost too high. boost value.
● Inverter capacitance ● Select inverter with right
is too small. capacitance.
● Deceleration time is ● Prolong deceleration
too short. time.
Dec ● Load potential energy ● Connect external braking
E.oC2 over-curren or inertia is too large. resistance or braking
t ● Power voltage unit.
fluctuation over limit. ● Select inverter with right
capacitance.
Constant ● Check load change and
● Sudden load change.
speed eliminate it.
E.oC3 ● Power grid voltage is
over-curren ● Check input power,
too low.
t eliminate fault.
● V/F curve setting is ● Reset V/F curve or torque
not suitable.Or torque boost value.
boost too high. ● Check input power,
● Power grid voltage is eliminate fault.
too low. ● Unreasonable
Motor
E.oL1 ● Unright overload [F5.06/FA.16] setting.
over-load
protection setting. ● Adjust load or select
● Locked-rotor run or inverter with right
too heavy load. capacitance.
● Universal motor long ● If need long low-speed
time low speed run. operation, please choose
55
special motor for inverter.

● Load is too heavy. ● Select inverter with right
● Acceleration time is capacitance.
too short. ● Prolong acceleration time
Inverter
E.oL2 ● Start running motor. ● Restart motor util it totally
over-load
● V/F curve setting is stop. Set F1.00 as 1or2.
not suitable.Or torque ● Reset V/F curve or torque
boost too high. boost value.
● Acceleration time is ● Prolong acceleration time
too short. properly.
● Short circuit between ● Check periphery
inverter output equipments and restart
System
E. SC phases or earth. after fault eliminating.
abnormality
● Module is damaged. ● Seek support from factory.
● Electromagnetic ● Check system wiring,
disturb. earth, shield and deal as
required.
● Temperature is too
● Make the environment
high.
meet the requirement.
● Air channel is
● Clear the air channel.
blocked.
Inverter ● Check and reconnect the
E.oH1 ● Fan connection parts
over-heat wire
is loose.
● Change the same new
● Fan is damaged.
fan.
● Temperature
● Seek support from factory.
detection circuit fault
● Temperature is too
● Make the environment
high.
meeting the requirement.
● Air channel is
● Clear the air channel.
blocked.
Rectifier ● Check and reconnect the
E.oH2 ● Fan connection parts
over-heat wire.
is loose.
● Change the same new
● Fan is damaged.
fan.
● Temperature
detection circuit fault
● Detection overtime
● Start static detection
● Check motor connection
while motor is
wire.
running.
Motor static ● Detect after motor
● Capacitance
E.TE1 detection stopping totally.
difference is too big
fault ● Change inverter model.
between motor and
● Reset parameter
inverter.
according to nameplate.
● Motor parameter
setting mistake.
56
● Electromagnetic
E.EEP/ Memory disturb in memory ● resume load and save.
A.EEP fault period. ● Seek support from factory.
● EEPROM damage.
LIFE Reserved ● ● Expand fault code.
● Check 3-phase power

Input side
E.ILF/ ● 3-phase input power supply and the phase.
open
A.ILF open phase. ● Check 3-phase power
phase
supply wiring.
Output side ● Check 3-phase output
● 3-phase output power
E.oLF open voltage and current.
open phase
phase ● Check wiring.
Output ● Output earth terminal ● Check wiring and
E.Gnd
earth short circuit. insulation.
Current ● Seek for technic support.
● Detect circuit fault.
E.HAL detection ● Check motor and wiring.
● Phase imbalance
fault
Inverter
● Peripheral equipment ● Check peripheral
E. EF external
fault protection. equipment.
fault
Keyboard ● Keyboard wire fault.
● Check keyboard wire.
E.PAn connect ● Keyboard component
fault damage.
● Unsuitable baud rate
setting. ● Set suitable baud rate
● Communication wire setting.
Rs485com
breaks. ● Check communication
E. CE munication
● Communication wire.
fault
format does not ● Set right communication
match upper format.
machine.
● Parameter copy
communication is ● Check wire.
Parameter
E.CPE fault. ● Select the specified
copy fault
● Copy keyboard is not external keyboard model.
match the inverter.
● Communication
between extend card
Extend
and frequency ● Check connector, and
card
E.ECF inverter overtime. re-insert wire.
connection
● Extend card does not ● Choose the named card.
fault
match frequency
inverter.
57
PG card
● PG card and inverter
E.PG connection ● Check the connection
connection failure
abnormal
● PID feedback upper ● Confirm the sensor
limit of disconnection state,if broken, change it.
alarm is improper ● Repair the wiring.
● PID feedback lower
● Confirm the setting value
PID limit of disconnection
of [Fb.27] and [Fb.28].
E.PID/ alarm is improper
feedback
A.PID ● PID feedback wiring
failure
unreliable
● Sensor with feedback
failure
● Feedback input loop
failure
Initial
● Check motor parameters；
position ● Check motor
E.IAE ● Study after motor stop；
angle study parameter
failure
●Detection time or ●Check motor parameter,

Speed detection level setting and self study again；
E.DEF
deviation unreasonable ● Check FA.24/FA.25
/A.DEF
too large ● Motor parameters parameter setting；
abnormal ●Seek support from factory.
●FA.27/FA.28 parameter
setting abnormal ● Check motor parameter,
E.SPD Rapid ● Motor parameters and self study again；
/A.SPD protection abnormal ● Check FA.27/FA.28
● Check F6 VC control parameter setting；
parameter
Load ● Detection time or

E.LD1 ●Check FA.18/FA.19
protection detection level setting
/A.LD1 parameter setting；
1 unreasonable
Load ● Detection time or

E.LD2 ● Check FA.20/FA.21
protection detection level setting
/A.LD2 parameter setting；
2 unreasonable
58
CPU
E.CPU ● CPU timed timeout ● Seek support from factory.
timeout
Chart 5-1: Fault information and details

5.3 Fault diagnoses process
System fault diagnoses process
system fault
yes
Clearshortcircuit W hetherthere is shortcircuitbetween outoutterm inalU/V/W and the m otor
no
yes
Shortthe cable or Cable between outputterm inalU/V/W and m otor
add outoutreactor is too long thatleakage currentcause inverterprotection
no
yes
Cleardisturbance Is there serious electrom agnetic disturbance?
no
yes
W hile disconnectoutput wire and run,whetherthere is system faultalarm
no
no
yes
Connectload and
Three phase outoutvoltage balance is ok ornot?
operate as follows
yes
yes
Reduce load or
W hetheroverload ornot?
enhance power
no no no
no yes
Display E.SC Display E.SC Display E.SC while Display E.SC while
while start while stop constantspeed m achine stop
yes
yes
yes no
yes
no
Torque enhance value W hetheracceleration W hetherdeceleration W hetherload
is suitable ornot tim e is too short tim e is too short change suddently
no yes yes
yes
no
Torque enhance ACC tim e can be Dec tim e can be Reduce load change
valuecan be prolonged ornot
reduced ornot prolonged ornot orenhance power
yes yes yes no
Check braking m ode,

Reduce Prolong setting tim e
seek tec support
Reduce load or Inverterfaultorm isaction caused by

enhance power noises.Pls find technic support
59
Over current diagnoses process

Accelerate over Decelerate over Constantspeed
curentE.0C1 curentE.0C2 overcurentE.0C3
yes
W hethershortcircuitbetween outputterm inal
Clearshortcircuit
U/V/W and m otororearth circuit
no no no
yes
Reduce load or
W hetherload is too large
enhance power
no
no
W hethertorque
Can be reduced? enhance value is too no no
yes yes
Is acceleration tim e Is deceleration

Reduce the value
settoo short? tim e settoo short?
no
yes no yes
M ay faultorm isaction
caused by noise.Please no
W hetherload
find technic support
changes suddently
yes
yes
Setlongeracceleration W hethersetlonger Reduce load change
tim e ornot? decelerationtim e orim prove power
yes
Prolong setting tim e
no
no
Reduce load change Check braking m ode

orim prove power and seek fortechnic support
60
Over voltage diagnoses process
ACC over DCC over Constantspeed Stop state over

voltage(O U1) voltage(O U2) overvoltage(O U3) voltage(O U4)
no
Reduce powervoltage
Fowervotage in fixed range ornot
into fixed range
yes yes yes

yes
Clearshortcircuit Phase orearth shortcirsuitbwteen U/V/W and m otor
no no no
yes
Stop m otorand restart. W hetheritstops while restartthe m otor
O rDC braking,then
start(F1.00:1).O rspeed
no no no
track start(F1.00:2)
W hetheractwhile load suddently changes to"0"
no no no
no
W hetherDC circuitvoltage ofm ain loop is above protection value while act
M aybe inverterfaultor
m isact.Plese seek for yes yes yes
no yes
technic support
W hetheractwhile yes
suddently stop ACC Can prolong DCC tim e ornot
yes no
no
yes
ACC tim e can be
prolong ornot prolong
no
yes
Reduce Load intertia can be reduced ornot
no no no
W hetherused braking unitorDC braking function Use braking unitorDC

braking function
yes yes yes
Please check braking unitand seek fortechnic support
61
Supply voltage is too low

Voltage is too low Voltage is too low
w hile stop(L.U .1) w hile running(E.LU 2)
yes
R estartafterreset W hetherpow eroff,including instantpow eroff
no no
C hange faultcom ponent

yes
Is there any faultcom ponentorbad contactin pow ercircuit
and correctbad contact
no no
M odify pow ersupply
no
system as required W hetherpow ervoltage is in fixed range as required
yes yes
yes
Is there any big load startorstop underthe sam e pow ersupply
no no
no
AdjustFA.10 setting votage betw een D C circuitP+ and N -in
m ain loop is overFA.10 setting ornot
yes yes
M aybe inverterfault.please seek fortechnic support
Inner inverter over heat

Innerinverteroverheat
E.O H1,E,O H2
no
Change fan W hethercooling fan works norm ally
yes
M aybe tem perature ditection no
circuitfault.please seek for W hethertem perature display(C-12)is
technic support the sam e as the actualtem perature
yes
yes
Reduce load and W hetherload and carried frequency
carried frequency F0.17 setting are too high
no
yes
Clearthe air-logged channel W hetheraircooling channels are air-logged
no
Adjustthe tem perature to no
the fixed range as required W hetherthe tem perature is within the fixed range as required
yes
M aybe m achine faultorm isact.seek fortechnic support
62
Over load
M otoroverload E.O L1 Inverteroverload E.O L2
no W hetherelectric therm alrelay overload

Change externa
characteristic m atches the m otoroverload
ltherm alrelay
characteristic
yes
no
W hetherelectric therm alrelay overload
Correctsetting value
relay setting FA.20 is suiable
yes
Reduce load or yes
im prove capacity W hetherload too high
no no
Restartafterm otorstop or yes
change startm ode F1.00 W hetherthe m otorstops while restart
to 1/2
no no
yes
Prolong ACC/DCC tim e W hetherACC/DCC tim e is too short
no no no
Change torque im proving
W hethertorque im proving orV/F curve setting is suitable
orV/F curve setting
yes yes
M aybe inverterfaultorm isact.Please seek fortechnic support
63
No display
Inverterkeyboard
LED no display
yes W hetherpow erindicater no W hethercircuitbreaker

W hetherkeyboard
connectline is reliable linghton pow erboard is atpowerside is connectto
on ornot contacter
yes
yes no no
connect W hetherpow erinput connect

term inals R /S/T is norm al
no
yes
W hetherthere is shortconnect Find ourthe faultcause

orDC reactorbetween term inals and clearthe fault
P1 and P+l
no
yes
M aybe inverter faultorm otorheat Shortconnector

caused by noise.Please find technic support connectD C reactor
Motor heat
m otorheat
no yes
Adjusttorque im poroving W hethertorque im proving and V/ W hetherm otorcontinuously
value and V/F characteristic F characteristic are suitable ornot run atlow speed
no
yes
yes
Reduce load or
im prove capacity W hetherload is too large Use specialm otorforinverter
no
yes
W hetheroutputterm inals U/V/W output
voltage /currentthree phase balance well M aybe m otorfault
no
M aybe inverterfaultorm otorheatcaused by

noise.Please find technic support
64
Motor does not rotate
Motor does
not work
yes no
Work after solving Whether keyboard Have input command
fault and reset displays fault information signal or not
yes
no
no
It works after checking It works after checking
Have input frequency
the cause and solving the cause and slving the
signal or not
the problem problem
yes
Whether upper frequency limit F0.11 or given yes It works after correct the
frequency is lower than the start frequency upper frequency or given
F1.02 setting frequency
yes
no Maybe inverter fault

Is there voltage output on output terminal U/V/W
and three phase balance ok or not? .Please find technic
support
yes
yes
no
Whether load Whether wiring is
is too large Correct connect
correct or not
yes
no
no
Motor fault Whether torque improving Improve torque
value is suitable improving value
yes
Maybe motor is locked because of too large

,load.Load should be reduced.If there is braking
or brake unit,please check whether it is loose
65
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL PERIODIC OVERHAUL AND MAINTENANCE
Chapter 6 Periodic Overhaul and Maintenance

This chapter explains the safety rules in overhaul and maintenance.
● No operation under power connected state. Otherwise, there is danger of
electric shock even death.
● Before operation, please cut all related equipments power, ensure that the
main circuit DC current has droped to safe range. And please operate after
● 5No
mins.
operation while cover/panel is dismantled. Otherwise there is danger of
electric shock even death.
● Do not dismantle the cover or PCB under power connected state.
Otherwise there is danger of electric shock death.
● Only professional person can maintain or change fittings. Otherwise, there
is danger.
●Do not wear loose clothes when install, debug, maintain. Related protective
tools and safeguard should be adopted.
● Tighten screw according to named torque. If main circuit wire connection is
loose, there is danger of overheat fire.
● Machine and motor earth must be reliable. Otherwise, there is danger of
electric shock if touch the cover.
● While operation, please follow the ESD regulations. Otherwise, the inverter
maybe damaged.
● Do not change the circuit or structure of the inverter. Otherwise, the
● Please confirm the rotate direction while no-load. Wrong direction can
bring body injury or
huge wealth loss.
● Do not use damaged machine. Otherwise, there is danger of accident.
6.2 Overhaul
Frequency inverter is composed by semi-conductive components, passive electronic component
and motive component. All of these components have useful life. Even under normal working
environment, some of the components can not work after the life time. To avoid malfunction, daily
checking, periodic overhaul, component changing and other maintenance should be carried out to
prevent. We suggest one overhaul every 3-4 months after installation. The overhaul period should
be shortened while under cases as below.
High temperature, high altitude;
Start and stop frequently;
AC power supply or load fluctuate badly;
With serious vibration or impact;
With dust, metal dust, salt, vitriol, chlorine;
Bad storage environment;
64
● Daily checking
To avoid machine damage and to prolong life time, please check the following items everyday.
Items Checking content Treatment
Check if power supply meets the
Power supply requirement and whether there is Treat it as nameplate explains.
lack-phase.
Check whether it meets the table3-1
Surroundings Make sure the problem and solve it.
requirement.
Check whether the inverter or the
Check whether it overload. Tighten
motor heat or change color
Cooling system screw. Check whether cooling fan is
abnormally and cooling fan working
dirty or stall rotate.
state.
Tighten machine and electric
Check if there is abnormal vibration
Motor connection and lubricate the
or noise.
machine components.
Check whether output current is over
Make sure whether it overload and
Load the rated value of the motor or the
whether the machine model is right.
inverter and has lasted for a period.
No operation under power connected state. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock
death. Before operating, please cut all related equipments power, ensure that the main
circuit DC current has dropped to safe range. And please operate after 5 mins.
● Periodic overhaul
Under normal state, one overhaul every 3 or 4 months is ok. Please confirm the actual overhaul
period according to the machine use condition and work circumstance while using the machine.
Main circuit
Items Checking content Treatment
Check insulated resistance; Tighten and change bad
Whole Check circumstance. component;
Clear and improve circumstance.
● Check whether the wire and
connector color changes,
whether there is disrepair, ● Change bad wire.
crack color change or aging in ● Fasten terminals and change bad
Electric connection insulated layer. terminals.
● Check whether the connect ● Measure earth resistance and
terminals are frayed, fasten earth terminals.
damaged or loose.
● Earth checking.
● Check if there is abnormal
Mechanical ●Tighten, lubricate and change the
vibration or noise or
connection bad components.
something is loose.
● Check whether there is dust or
semi-conductive ● Clean operation environment
rubbish.
component ● Change damaged component
● If there is obvious out change
65
● Whether there is liquid leak,

color change or crack.
Electrolytic
Whether the safety valve ● Change damaged component
capacitor
outcrop, inflation, creak or
liquid leak.
Peripheral ● Peripheral equipment outlook ● Clear and change damaged

equipment and insulation checking. component.
● Peculiar smell color change, ● Fasten connector
PCB bad rust and connector ● Clear PCB
checking. ● Change damaged PCB
● Check whether the fan is
damaged or blocked up.
● Whether rubbish and dust is
●Clean operation environment
Cooling system stuck to the heatsink .
● Change damaged component
● Is air inlet/outlet blocked? Or
is there something sticking to
the inlet/outlet.
● Whether it is damaged. Check
Keyboard ● Change damaged component
whether display is complete.
● Tighten machine and electric
● Check if there is abnormal
Motor connection and lubricate the
vibration or noise.
machine components.
No operation under power connected state. Otherwise, there is danger of electric
shock death. Before operating, please cut all related equipments power, ensure that
the main circuit DC current has dropped to safe range. And please operate after 5
mins.
6.3 Maintenance
All equipments and components have useful life. Right maintenance can prolong the lifetime. But it
can not avoid damage. Please change the components before their lifetime over.
Component Useful lifetime
Fan 2~3year
Electrolytic capacitor 4~5 year
PCB 8~10 year
● Fan
While changing fan, please use original fan. You can contact Veichi company or the
dealer. There are inverter models with many fans in one machine. To prolong these
machines’ lifetime, you had better to change all fans while changing the cooling fan.
● Fan change method:
66
1. Install the fan vertically into the cover as shown in the picture (the label should face the
outside).
2. Press the elastic clip of the fan by finger toward the inner side and insert the leading terminal
of the fan vertically by a little strength.
3. Insert the two elastic clips of the fan cover vertically into the fan installation slots.
● Fan dismantlement：
67
1. Pinch the two elastic clips of the fan and pull out. Then dismantle the fan cover.
2. Press the elastic clip of the fan by finger toward the inner side and pull out the leading
terminal of the fan vertically by a little strength.
3. Poke the clips toward the outside and detach the fan from the cover by a little strength.
① No operation under power connected state. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock death.
Before operating, please cut all related equipments power, ensure that the main circuit DC current
has dropped to safe range. And please operate after 5 mins.
② While the inverter is working, the heatsink temperature will be higher as the consumption. To
prevent from scald, please do not touch the heatsink and do not change the fan until the
temperature being safe.
③To ensure the best performance of the inverter, please use the original fan.
● Other components
The replacement of the other components has strict requirements on maintenance technic and
product familiarity. And they can not be used without strict detection after replacement. So we
suggest the user not to replace the other inner components. If they need to change indeed, please
contact to the dealer or the sales department of Veichi electric company.
68
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENTS AND OPTIONS
Chapter 7 Peripheral Equipments and Options

User must obey to the following safety rules and related requirements while using the peripheral
equipments and selecting components.
● No operation under power connected state. Otherwise, there is danger of
electric shock.
●Before operation, please cut all related equipments power, ensure that the
main circuit DC current has dropped to safe range. And please operate
after 5 mins.
●No operation while cover/panel is dismantled. Otherwise, there is danger
of electric shock.
●Do not dismantle the cover or PCB under power connected state.
Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock.
●Only professional person can install, debug or maintain the peripheral
equipments and options. Otherwise, there is danger.
●Do not ware loose clothes when install, debug, maintain. Rated protective
tools and safeguard should be adopted.
●Do not change wire, dismantle jumping wire, optional card, or change
cooling fan while the inverter is running. Otherwise, there is danger of
electric shock.
●Tighten screw according to named torque. If main circuit wire connection
is loose, there is danger of overheat fire.
● Earth of the peripheral equipments and options must be reliable to
prevent human body injury.
●While operation, please follow the ESD regulations. Otherwise, the
●Do not cut the power supply while the inverter is outputting voltage.
Otherwise, the inverter maybe damaged.
7.2 Peripheral equipments

Normal peripheral equipments are showed as follows. To order the peripheral equipments, please
consult our dealer or sales department.
Peripheral equipment Functions
Protect power system and prevent malfunction

Breaker impact other equipments working when
short-circuit happens. And over-load protection.
Earth protection prevent electric shock(suggest to
Leakage current breaker use the type which can prevent high-frequency
leakage current)
Separate power and inverter indeed and realize

Electromagnetic contactor
basic relay control.
69
Improve power side factor and isolate the noise

AC input reactor disturbance to the frequency inverter from the
power side.
Restrain ultra harmonics and improve power

DC reactor
factor.
Reduce frequency inverter disturbance to the

Input side noise filter
power and reduce the power grid disturbance.
Braking resistor Passive energy consume unit of electric braking.
Electric braking control unit, controlling the braking

Consumption braking unit resistance consume the regenerated electric
power of the motor efficiently.
Reduce the output side wire electromagnetic

Output side noise filter
disturbance.
Standby system Standby system for inverter malfunction.
Heat relay Protect the motor while over load.
Reduce electromagnetic disturbance of the

0-phase reactor
frequency inverter (suitable for input/output side).
Main loop surge Restrain surge voltage while main loop switch
absorption unit components act.
Winding surge absorption Restrain surge voltage when the AC contactor

unit acts.
70
7.3 The use of peripheral equipments

power
Inverter
⑨
Braking resistance
Braking unit
①
Breaker
PB
P(+)
VECHI
www.veichi.com
A+
⑤
② Surge restrainer B-
Leakge current S T U V W E
supportPC
N(-)P(+) PB R
breaker M ain loop surge

absorbale unit tool(software)
RS T UVW E
W inding surge
absorbable unit Earthing
③
Contactor
⑧
Zero-phase rector
④
Rector M otor
⑥ ⑦
P1 Inputside noise
(+)
filter O utputside
noise filter
AC rector DC rector
⑩ Earthing
Heatrelay
Controlsysytem standby
Chart 7-1: Peripheral equipments connetion fig

Note：
1 Wiring breaker
To ensure wiring safe, protect power system and prevent malfunction impact other equipment
working when short-circuit happens, and protect while over-load, please do use wiring breaker
between power supply and main loop power input terminals R,S,T.
While choosing the breaker, the capacitance should be about 1.5-2 times of the rated
output current of the frequency inverter. Please compare the time characteristic of
breaker and the characteristic of the inverter protection (150% of the rated output
current, one minute). Make sure there will be no skip.
Before main loop wiring, make sure to cut the breaker and electromagnetic contactor.
Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock.
2 Leakage current breaker
The frequency inverter outputs peak voltage high-speed switch square wave, so there is high
frequency leakage current. For earth protection to prevent electric shock and leakage current fire,
71
please install leakage current breaker. Usually, one frequency inverter will bring 100mA leakage
current (while the power cable length is 1m). If the length prolongs 1m, there will be 5mA more
leakage current. So please use leakage current breaker special for high frequency leakage at the
power input side of the frequency inverter. The factors which impact leakage current are as follows:
Capacitance of inverter;
Carrier frequency;
Motor cable type and wire length;
EMI/RFI filter.
To protect human body and inverter, please choose leakage current breaker which can use
AC/DC power and can reply high frequency leakage current. There should be one leakage current
breaker with more than 200mA sensitive current for every frequency inverter. If the frequency
inverter outputs different wave, the high frequency leakage current will be higher, what will make
the breaker malfunction. At this case, please take following treatments:
Improve the sensitive current of the leakage current breaker;
Reduce the carrier frequency of the inverter.
3 Electromagnetic contactor
Electromagnetic contactor is a peripheral equipment what is set to separate power and

inverter connection. While inverter protective function is acting or carrying out emergency stop
operation, the main loop power can be cut by peripheral equipment. Please do not connect the
electromagnetic switch or electromagnetic contactor to output circuit. Otherwise, the inverter
maybe damaged. While the power recovers after instant stop, if it needs to prevent the inverter to
auto-restart, please install electromagnetic contactor for control at the input side.
4 AC input reactor and DC reactor
To restrain current sharp change and high hypo harmonic current, it needs to use AC input
reactor and DC reactor. It can also improve power factor at the input side. In the following cases,
AC input reactor or DC reactor must be used (use both will bring better effect).
Need to restrain ultra harmonics current and improve power side factor;
Need to switch input phase capacitance;
When frequency inverter is connected to large capacitance power transformer (600kVA
above);
Silicon-controlled converters such as DC motor driver are connected to the same power
system.
If user has higher requirement on other harmonic restraint, please connect the external DC
reactor .Before connecting the external DC reactor, make sure to dismantle the short connector
between the terminals P1 and (+).
5 Surge restrainer
Surge restrainer is divided to winding surge restrainer and main loop surge restrainer
according to the use position. Pls choose the right one which is suitable for the occasion. The aim
of surge restrainer installation is restraining the surge voltage brought by switch components such
as inductive load which is surrounding the frequency inverter (electromagnetic contactor,
electromagnetic relay, electromagnetic valve, electromagnetic winding, electromagnetic detent).
Do not connect the surge restrainer to the output side of the frequency inverter. Otherwise, the
frequency inverter will be damaged.
6 Input side noise filter
Rectifier bridge of the inverter is uncontrolled rectifier. And input current is discontinuous
impulse current. So the harmonic current noise signal, what flows to power wire from the inverter
72
inner, maybe bring bad impact on the surrounding machines (radio, phone, noncontact switch,
sensor). This time, we suggest to instal input side noise filter to lighten the noise into the power
wire. Besides, it can also reduce noise from the power wire into the frequency inverter.
Please use the special noise filter for the frequency inverter and the connection wire
between the filter and the inverter should be as short as possible.
7 Output side noise filter
The frequency inverter outputs square wave with high-speed peak value voltage switch. So
there is high-speed dv/dt conver on the output cables that will produce a large number of radio
disturbance and inductive signal. By installation noise filter at the output side, the impact can be
relieved. Please do not install the into phase capacitance and the noise filter to the output circuit.
Otherwise, there is danger of damage to the frequency inverter.
8 0-phase reactor
0-phase reactor is used for reducing the electromagnetic interference of the frequency inverter,
which is suitable for the input side and output side. It equals to a three-phase common mode
inductance. In actual use, according to the actual magnetic core size and cable specification, it is
better to make sure 3-5 circles winding ratio to bring the best performance.
9 Braking reactor or braking unit
Renewable electricity consumption unit, please see the sixth part of the chapter three “electric
installation”.
10 Heat relay
Please install the heat relay at the output side of the frequency inverter. When the motor enters
into overload state, it will cut the power source to protect the motor. While using one frequency
inverter to drive one motor, it is unnecessary to install heat relay. The motor overload protection
current [FA.16] of the frequency will work. While using one frequency inverter to drive multiple
motors or the motor is drove directly by the power grid, please install heat relay between the
inverter and the motor. While installing the heat relay, please design to cut the sequence control
circuit of the MC at the main loop iuput side by the connection spot of the relay or design to input
the heat relay action into the frequency inverter as the exterior malfunction. And please pay
attention to the following tips to avoid heat relay malfunction and motor overheating at low speed.
Run at low speed
One frequency inverter run multiple motors
Motor cable is very long
Detect malfunction mistakenly for carrier frequency is too higher.
Low speed and heat relay
In normal case, the heat relay is suitable for the universal motor. While using the frequency
inverter to run the universal motor (standard motor), the motor current is 5-10% higher, comparing
with the commercial power supply. Besides, at low speed, even in the motor rated current range,
the cooling capability of the fan drove by the motor axis will reduce, which will bring motor overheat.
So please set the motor overheat protection current [FA.16] in the frequency inverter to be valid.
Motor cable is longer
While the motor cable is longer and the carrier frequency is higher, impacted by the leakage
current, the heat relay maybe malfunction. To avoid it, please reduce the carrier frequency or set
higher detection value of the heat relay. Before enhance the detection value, do confirm whether
there is other cause for the motor overheat. Otherwise, there is danger.
73
AC200HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL QUALITY GUARANTEE
Chapter 8 Quality Guarantee

8.1 Guarantee time and range
Guarantee time
Users can enjoy the following “three guarantee” service from the day of buying products if meeting
products quality problem:
●We guarantee for repair, return and replacement for one month after delivery;
●We guarantee for repair and replacement for three months after delivery;
●We guarantee for repair for eighteen months after delivery;
●The articles above do not apply to export.
Guarantee range
Installation and debugging: In principle, it should be carried by users. Our company provides
technical support. But we can afford installation and debugging service with charge.
On-site diagnosis: In principle, it should be carried by users. Our company gives technical support.
But we can afford on-site diagnosis service with charge. According to diagnosis, if it is our liability, it
will be free.
Malfunction maintain: While meeting malfunction, if it is quality problem and within guarantee time,
we will repair free of charge. The malfunctions, caused by the reasons mentioned as follows, can
only enjoy the paid service even if the product under warranty:
●The malfunctions caused by improper storage or faulty operation which are not in
compliance with this user manual.
●The malfunctions caused by unauthorized transformation.
●The malfunctions caused by over-range operation.
● Have over guarantee time.
●The malfunctions caused by nature causes.
8.2 Liability exemption
Our company only takes on the liability according to our guarantee time and range. If you need
more liability guarantee, you should buy proper commercial insurance from insurance company in
advance. The other extended loss caused by malfunctions of our product is not within our
guarantee range. Cases as follows, regardless of whether it is within guarantee time,it is not within
our guarantee range. If need service, you has to pay for it.
●The malfunctions caused by improper storage or faulty operation.
●The malfunctions caused by unauthorized transformation.
●The malfunctions caused by over-range operation.
●Have been over guarantee time.
●The malfunctions caused by nature causes.
●User has not paid off the payment according to the contract.
8.3 Product application
●This product is not designed and produced for the case of vital importance.
● If need to apply this product in manned mobile machine, medical, aerospace , unclear
energy, electric power, devices or system for submarine communications transit, please
contact the sales department of our company. We do not take on the liability of the accident
while this product is used in these cases without authorization.
●This product is produced under strict quality management. But we can not ensure that there
will be no malfunction. If the user requires more safety requirement and reliability, standby
74
AC200HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL QUALITY GUARANTEE
device should be deployed. If the user need more guarantee, proper commercial insurance
should be considered.
74
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL FUNCTION PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
9 FUNCTION PARAMETER SPECIFICATION

9.1 Basic parameters
F0.00 Control mode Setting range: 0-8 Factory set: 0
Asynchronous motor control mode(AM):
0: V/F control control voltage/frequency ratio,can automatically compensate stator resistance
voltage loss ,and automatically compensate slip frequency. Compared with control mode 1, it has
higher low-frequency torque and speed accuracy .It can used for situation without encoder speed
feedback which has higher requirement for low-frequency torque.
1: Reserved.
2: Reserved
3: High performance VC without PG: VC control mode without speed sensor.This mode is used
for all speed control.Please set this mode when need high accuracy speed control .
In this mode, the torque can response quickly even without motor feedback signal.Low speed
motor can also have high torque when it runs.
4: High performance VC with PG: VC control mode without speed sensor.This mode is used for
all speed control in which quick torque response and high-performance torque control are
necessary.High accuracy speed control to zero speed. To receive motor speed feedback signal, it
need use PG option card.
Mainly used for application which has strict requirement for control performance such as high
accuracy speed control、torque control、simple servo control etc.
Synchronous motor control mode(SM):
5:Reserved
6: High-performance VC without PG:Permanent magnet synchronous machine(PMSM) VC
control without PG.By software algorithm, set the whole model and observer of PMSM. The model
requires complete identification of no-load motor,and be suitable for occasion which has higher
requirement for ACC /DEC time and impact load.
7: VC with PG:PMSM VC control with PG,has character of dynamic response and high control
performance. It can be used for torque control 、weak magnetic and high speed run and high
power servo control.
Other control:
8:Voltage frequency differential output: output voltage and output frequency can set and adjust
individually ,usually used for EPS power、torque motor control、high frequency heat etc industry.
Note: 1. PG: means inspects speed pulse encoder,used for VC control with PG.Usually
there are photoelectric encoder and rotary encoder.Choose corresponding PG card
according to the type and parameters.Please refer to function code [F5.30].
2. While choose VC control mode, before the first running, it has to input right motor
parameters and motor parameters self adjust to gain right motor parameter. Please
refer to details of F5 parameter groups.
3. Rightly setting VC control parameters to ensure good stable and dynamic control
performance. For VC control parameter setting and adjustment, please refer to
details of F6 parameter groups.
4. While choose VC control mode, all inverters can only drive one motor, and the
capacitance rating difference between the inverters and the motor can’t be too large.
The inverter can be 2 rating bigger or 1 rating smaller than the motor. Otherwise, it
75
will descend the control performance. Or the drive system can’t run normally.
F0.01 Reserved
Run command
F0.02 Setting range: 0-3 Factory set: 0
channel
It is channel for inverter receiving run and stop order and run direction. It is only used for starting
and stopping control under torque control.
0: Keyboard control Inverter run and stop is controlled by keyboard key FWD, REV/JOG,
STOP/RESET. REV/JOG key is defined as reverse while [F4.07] set as “0” and jog while [F4.07]
set as “1”.
1: Terminal control Run command control by multi-function input terminal FWD、REV、FWD JOG、
REVJOG etc.Please refer to details of [F2.00~F2.06].Terminal control running mode refers to
details of [F2.26].Terminal start protection refers to details of [F2.27].
2: RS485 communication control Upper machine gives running command by communication
given.Communication parameters setting refers to Fd communication control parameter group.
When point to point broadcast communicates, slave machine chooses running command
transferred by master machine as the running command. Please refer to instruction of [Fd.09].
When Modbus RS485 communication is valid , running command is set and changed by address
0x3001/0x2001. Details refer to appendix 2.
When PROFIBUS-DP communication is valid,running command is set and changed by
corresponding address.Details refer to option card Profibus-DP card manual.
When CANopen communication is valid ,running command is set and changed by corresponding
address. Details refer to option card CANopen card manual.
AC200 supports Modbus、Profibus-DP、CANopen upper machine communication mode. The
three modes couldn’t be used at the same time.Profibus-DP、CANopen mode need to install
communication card, which is optional accessory, and users can choose according to the needs.
3: Optional card Inverter run and stop is controlled by external optional card communication. For
the optional card installation, parameter setting and so on, please refer use manual packing with
the optional card.
Note:1.While fault reset, key STOP/RESET, control terminal reset order and RS485
communication terminal are valid reset order.
2. While inverter input frequency is 0Hz or lower than min output frequency [F1.26]. As
long as you input run order, keyboard FWD indicator will be on, the motor will run as
0 frequency.
Clew: keyboard key STOP/RESET function can be selectable. Under exterior terminal
control or communication control, it can be defined as stop function. Please refer to
[F4.08]. Under exterior terminal control, if use STOP/RESET to stop, inverter stops and
close exterior terminal run order. It needs to input exterior terminal stop order and
unlock. The exterior terminal run order will be valid again. So is the communication
control.
F0.03 Frequency given source channel A Setting range: 0-11 Factory set: 0
F0.04 Frequency given source channel B Setting range: 0-11 Factory set: 1
76
It is used to select frequency given gain channel in[F0.03]、[F0.04]. The A and B channel’s
relationship can be defined by parameter [F0.06].
0: Keyboard number given Given frequency is given by [F0.08] keyboard numbers setting
frequency.;and parameter [F4.09] LED “0” digit “keyboard up/down key modification selection” is
used to quickly modify [F0.08] setting value. Parameter value power down save and “UP/DOWM
key”action limit refer to [F4.09].
1: Keyboard potentiometer given Given frequency is given by keyboard potentiometer.By using
potentiometer,the input voltage is linearized and 100% corresponds with Max frequency.Please
refer to [F4.10-F4.13] details .
2: Terminal VS voltage analog
3: Terminal AI analog
4: Terminal AS current analog
Given frequency is given and modified by VS/AI/AS. By linearizing input analog,100% corresponds
with Max frequency. Please refer to [F3] parameter group.
5: Terminal pulse signal Given frequency is given and modified by (PUL) input pulse signal.By
linearizing input PUL signal,100% corresponds with Max frequency. Please refer to [F2.30-F2.35] .
6:RS485 communication port: Given frequency is given by RS485 communication .
Communication parameters refer to Fd communication control parameter groups .
When point to point broadcast communicates, slave machine chooses running command
transferred by master machine as the running command. Please refer to instruction of [Fd.09].
When Modbus RS485 communication is valid , running command is set and changed by address
0x3001/0x2001. Details refer to appendix 2.
When PROFIBUS-DP communication is valid,running command is set and changed by
corresponding address.Details refer to option card Profibus-DP card manual.
When CANopen communication is valid ,running command is set and changed by corresponding
address. Details refer to option card CANopen card manual.
7: UP/DOWN control Given frequency is controlled by terminals to realize increment and
decline.The UP/DW terminal set by mulit function terminal(X1~X7) realize control by on-off with
COM.Please refer to details of [F2.00~F2.06].
8: PID control given While [F0.03]or[F0.04] select this channel,the VFD running mode is process
PID given.Set the frequency as output after PID、PID given value、feedback value. Refer to PID
control parameters “Fb”.
Through [F4.09] LED “0” digit ,select keyboard “UP/DOWN”key to quickly modify parameter [Fb.01]
current given value、parameter power down save and “UP/DW”key action limit selection.Please
refer to [F4.09].
PID control state and trait are changed by multifunction terminals. Details refer to [F2.00-F2.06].
77
9: Program control (PLC) given Given frequency and frequency running direction is controlled by
inner simple PLC control. Max 15 steps speed can be process control. Details see “FC” multi step,
PLC function and swing frequency parameter group. If one step speed running time is set as “0”, it
will jump over this step. It is convenient to set step speed. While [F0.16] LED “000” digit is 0,
frequency control direction is invalid. While [F0.16] LED”00”is 1—REV forbid and any step
direction is set as REV, this step run as 0 speed.
PLC and multi steps speed are both for frequency inverter vary speed and run under certain
rules. Under multi steps running, step switch and direction change is controlled by the different
combination between multi step control terminal and COM defined by multifunction input terminals.
PLC not only can define one cycle of multi steps frequency in the function parameters. It can also
define the run time, direction, ACC/DEC time and cycle mode of multi steps in the function
parameters. Multi steps control terminal can be defined by any multifunction terminal. Details refer
to [F2.00-F2.06].
10: Optional card Given frequency is given and modified by optional card communication. For
optional card installation, parameter setting please refers to user manual.
11: Multi-steps speed given Frequency setting is selected by multi-step speed terminal.If
frequency channel A、B both don’t choose multi-step speed given,while multi-step speed terminal is
valid,it has higher priority to change frequency to multi-step speed given.If each of channel A and B
chooses multi-step speed given,set the combination of frequency source.If all of the muti-step
speed terminal is invalid, multi-step given as 0 speed.” Multi-step speed terminal” selection refer
to[F2.00-F2.06] .
Frequency channel B reference

F0.05 Setting range: 0~1 Factory setting: 0
source
Frequency channel B reference source can be selected by this parameter.Frequency channel A

reference source is max frequency[F0.09].
0: Max frequency as reference source
1: Frequency set by channel A as the reference source.
Channel B setting frequency= Channel B frequency given source × Channel A setting frequency
absolute value/Max frequency
Frequency give channels

combinations mode
Used for inverter frequency setting channel A and channel B combination mode
0: Channel A Only channel A [F0.03] is valid, channel B [F0.04] is invalid.
1: Channel B Only channel B [F0.04] is valid, channel A [F0.03] is invalid.
2: Channel A+Channel B The sum of channel A[F0.03] add channel B [F0.04] is the given
frequency of the inverter.
3: Channel A-Channel B The result of channel A [F0.03] minus channel B [F0.04] is the output
frequency of the inverter.Frequency produced by this way could be negative value.Whether the
negative value output is valid, depends on [F0.16]setting.
4: MAX {Channel A, Channel B} The bigger one of channel A [F0.03] and channel B [F0.04] is the
output frequency of the inverter.
5: MIN {Channel A, Channel B} The smaller one of channel A[F0.03] and B [F0.04] is the output
78
frequency of the inverter.

Note: 1. While jog running command is valid,set the jog frequency as the inverter frequency.
2.While neither of channel A and channel B choose multi-step speed given,if multi-step
speed terminal selection is valid,set the corresponding frequency selected by
multi-speed terminal as the inverter given frequency.
3.While channel A and channel B choose the same reference source, no stack
operation.Choose the channel A setting frequency as the inverter frequency.
4:Frequency given source priority :from high to low in order:jog running frequency
running、multi-step speed given(non channel selection)、running command binding
given frewuency、frequency given source channel.
5.If rotate direction selection [F0.16] is set as reverse prohibition,then no matter how
the frequency control,when the frequency value is negative,the inverter will output
0.00 Hz frequency.
Note: Given frequency synthesized by channel A and channel B also be limited by upper
limit frequency and lower limit frequency.
Running command
F0.07 Setting range: 0000~DDDD Factory set: 0000
binding
While the parameter is valid，it is used for setting each running command channel binding
frequency source channel.When command source has a binding frequency source, during the
command source valid period,[F0.03~F0.06] will not be valid for the setting frequency.But
[F0.16]LED “000”digit frequency direction control is still valid.
0 : no binding frequency given depends on [F0.03~F0.06]setting.
1 : keyboard number given frequency
2 : Keyboard potentiometer given
3 : Terminal VS voltage
4 : Terminal AI analog given analog given
5 : Terminal AS current analog given
6 : Terminal pulse PUL given
7: RS485 communication given
8 : Terminal UP/DW control
9 : PID control given
A: Program control (PLC) given
B: Optional card
C: Multi-speed given
D: Reserved
Above 0~12 setting is the same with frequency given channel A[F0.03].
Keyboard number Setting range:

F0.08 Setting range: 0～upper limit
setting frequency 50.00Hz
This parameter is valid when frequency given channel [F0.03][F0.04] is set “0”:keyboard number
79
given and used to set and modify keyboard number setting frequency.
Factory set:
F0.09 Max frequency Setting range:upper limit～600.00Hz
50.00Hz
Upper limitation
F0.10 Setting range: 0~7 Factory set:0
source selection
Number give upper Setting range: Lower limitation-max Factory set:
F0.11
limitation output frequency 50.00Hz
Factory set:
F0.12 Lower limitation Setting range: 0.00-upper limitation
0.00Hz
Lower limitation run
mode
Max frequency : While analog input、impulse input、multi-step speed input are frequency
source,for each of them, 100% is relative to max frequency as a calibration .The max frequency the
frequency inverter permit to set. While [F1.16] LED “0” digit is 0, it is also the base of ACC/DEC
time setting.
Upper limitation source selection: To select the give source of upper frequency limitation of
frequency inverter. Upper limitation frequency is the upper limitation of the given frequency,and set
a limit of the given frequency.
0: Number given Upper limitation set by [F0.11].
1: Keyboard potentiometer given
2: Terminal VS voltage analog given
3: Terminal AI voltage analog given
4: Terminal AS current analog given
5: Terminal pulse signal given
6: RS485 communication given Set by address 0x3004/0x2004.Please refer to appendix 2:
Modbus communication protocol.
7. Option card
While use potentiometer、analog(Vs、AI、As)、terminal pulse、option card,it is similar with
frequency given channel A.Please refer to [F0.03].
Number give upper limitation: It is upper limit frequency given channel when [F0.10] is set as 0.
Lowest limitation: When given frequency is lower than lower limitation frequency, inverter could
run at 0 frequency、lower limitation frequency.The lower limitation frequency running mode is set by
[F0.13].
Lowest limitation run mode

0: Stop output, enter into pause running state Keep running state with no voltage output.
1: Run at lower limitation When actual given frequency is lower than the lower limitation, inverter
run at the lower limitation.
Note: 1.Max frequency, upper limitation and lower limitation set carefully according to
actual need please. Except upper limitation and lower limitation, inverter is also
limited by parameters set such as start frequency, stop detection frequency, stop DC
brake start frequency, jump frequency and so on. Max frequency, upper limitation
80
and lowest limitation relationship as below:
F0.14 ACC time 1 Setting range: 0.00-650.00s Factory set: model set
F0.15 DEC time 1 Setting range: 0.00-650.00s Factory set: model set
ACC time means the time needed for output frequency accelerate from 0.00Hz to time base
frequency.DEC time means the time needed for output frequency decelerate from time base
frequency to 0.00Hz. Max frequency、fix frequency 50Hz、given frequency chosen by [F1.16]
LED ”0” digit can be set as time base frequency . Details refer to [F1.16].
This inverter can set 4 kinds of ACC/DEC time. ACC/DEC time 1 is set by [F0.14~F2.15],and
ACC/DEC time 2/3/4 can be set by [F1.21~F2.26].ACC/DEC time 1 is the default value,if need to
select other ACC/DEC time group, it must select by control terminal. Details refer to [F2.00-F2.06] .
During process running, each step could select one of the 4 ACC/DEC time groups,and has no
relationship with the terminal selection.Please refer to [FC.31~FC.45].
JOG ACC/DEC time set by [F1.39, F1.40] .
Emergency stop DEC time is set by [F1.27].
F0.16 Rotate direction Setting range: 0000-0121 Factory set: 0000
LED“0”digit: running direction take the opposite To choose the adjustment of motor running
direction
0: Direction unchanged The actual run dirction is the came as required. Not adjust the current
81
direction.
1: Direction take the opposite The actual run dirction is reverse to requirement. Adjust the current
direction.
LED“00”digit: running direction prohibited To choose the effectiveness of motor running
direction
0: Forward and reverse commands are allowed Inverter receive forward and reverse commands
to control the motor
1: Only forward command is allowed Inverter only receive forward command to control the
motor, and the motor doesn’t run while given reverse command.
2: Only reverse commands are allowed Inverter only receive reverse command to control the
motor, and the motor doesn’t run while given forward command.
LED“000”digit: frequency control direction selection Used while the frequency given value
is negative,whether the negative frequency is allowed to change the current direction of inverter.
0: Invalid If the calculation result is negative,inverter will output 0.00Hz frequency.
1: Valid If the calculation result is negative,inverter will change current direction and output
corresponding frequency.
LED“0000”digit: reserved
Note: While reset to factory set, this setting is not changed.While this parameter is set a
certain value,all of the running command channel(operation board, external terminal, RS485
communication, optional card and program running) will be affected by the value.
F0.17～F0.18 Reserved
Parameter
F0.19 Setting range: 0～3 Factory set: 0
initialization
0: No action
1: Restore factory default (not restoring motor parameters) After the parameters restore factory
set, all the function parameters is restored as the factory default except the motor parameters.
2: Restore factory default (restoring motor parameters) After the parameters restore factory
set, all the function parameters is restored as the factory default besides the motor parameters.
3: Clear malfunction records Clear [FA.40~FA.59]all the history malfunction records
Note:
1. Not change [F0.16] and [F4.11-F4.14] setting while recover factory setting.
2. Keyboard shows SRVE while recover factory setting. SRVE disappear while initialization
finished. If inverter power off during the SRVE display period, it just carries out parts of the
parameters recovering.And please recover after power on again.
9.2 Run control parameter

F1.00 Start-up mode Setting range: 0-2 Factory set: 0
82
Start pre-excitation
F1.01 Setting range: 0.00-60.00s Factory set: model set
time
F1.02 Start frequency Setting range: 0.00-60.00Hz Factory set: 0.50Hz
Start frequency hold
F1.03 Setting range: 0.0-50.0s Factory set: 0.0s
time
Braking current
F1.04 Setting range: 0.0-150.0% Factory set: 60.0%
before start
Braking time before
start
Start-up mode
0: Start by start-up frequency [F1.02] start-up frequency and [F1.03] start-up frequency hold
time control the frequency inverter start. It is suitable for big static friction torque and small load
inertia occasion or occasion with external machine brake equipment. Motor spindle can keep static
before restart after stop.
1: DC brake and start. Firstly [F1.04] brake current and [F1.05] brake time give certain DC
braking energy to motor with load (electromagnetic hold brake). Then start by start-up frequency. It
is suitable for stop state, small inertia load with REV and FWD.
2: Speed track, direction judge and start Detect speed and direction firstly, then start as the
speed detected out and run to given frequency according to ACC/DEC time.
Note: Only software speed tracking below 4kw under open-loop control.
Start pre-excitation time: It is used to set pre-excitation time for asynchronous motor while start.
Building magnetic filed before starting,it can improve start performance and reduce start current
and start time.
Start frequency: It is the initial output frequency while start. Right start frequency can bring big
start torque. While start, certain instant force can be brought for load with big static friction under
static state.But if the value is set too big,sometimes it will display E.OC1 fault.
Start frequency hold time: How long the start frequency be hold.Inverter will enter into normal
ACC/DEC step after hold time.
Braking current before start: It is the braking current that the inverter gives the motor while DC
braking. 100% corresponds to the motor rated current. Only when [F1.00] is 1, there is DC braking
while start.When it is 0,DC braking is invalid.
Braking time before start: It is the time that DC braking current hold while start. Only when [F1.00]
is 1, there is DC braking while start. There is no DC braking while braking time is 0.0s.
Attention: Start frequency is not limited by lower limitation [F0.12]and 0 speed torque
threshold [F1.26] .
83
F1.06 Speed track speed Setting range: 0.00-60.00s Factory set: 0.50s
Speed tracking stop
F1.07 Setting range: 0.00～60.00s Factory set: 1.00s
delay
Speed track speed:While inverter speed tracking start,the time output voltage go to the normal
level at current speed. The shorter it is,the quicker speed tracking is,and the bigger the current
impact is.Inverter controls tracking speed automatically when time is 0.
Speed tracking stop delay :After inverter stops output,it takes sometime to output voltage and
restart motor,so that the current impact is ultra small.Inverter controls the delay automatically
when time is 0.
F1.08~F1.09 Reserved
F1.10 Stop mode Setting range:0~1 Factory set:0
0: DEC to stop According to the set DEC time and DEC mode, DEC to 0.00Hz and stop output.
While give frequency is small then stop DC braking start frequendy [F1.11], inverter output
frequency will change to 0. DC brake and stop work. Otherwise inverter will DEC to min output
frequency and stop work.
For inverter with build in braking unit (under than AC200-T3-018G) , braking resistance(optional)
can be used. When DC bus voltage is over [F4.23] dynamic braking act voltage, inverter begins to
carry out the dynamic braking act.
For inverter without build in braking unit (upper than AC200-T3-022G), braking unit and braking
resistance can be selected. It is mainly used for occasion that need quick braking while stop.
1: Free stop Inverter stop output while receiving the stop order，and motor free running to stop.
Usually, it cooperates with external machine hold brake.
Initial frequency of
F1.11 Setting range: 0.00-50.00Hz Factory set: 0.00Hz
stop DC braking
Stop DC braking
current
84
F1.13 Reserved
Stop DC braking
duration
Initial frequency of stop DC braking: While inverter DEC to this frequency, it will stop output and
start DC braking.While inverter stops and the output frequency is less than this frequency ,it will
start DC braking.While inverter DEC stops and the given frequency is less than this frequency,it
starts DC braking and the output frequency changes to 0.If the running condition doesn’t have strict
requirement of DC braking,the initial frequency should be set as less as possible at stop.
Stop DC braking current: It is the current that inverter give motor while DC braking. 100%
corresponds to the motor rated current. DC braking can afford 0 speed torque. It is usually used for
improving stop accuracy and quick stop. It can’t be used for DEC braking for normal running,which
means that once that it starts DC braking,the inverter will stop output.If the DC braking current is
set too big,while stop,it is easily to lead to over-current fault.DC braking is invalid if this parameter
is set 0.
Stop DC braking duration: It is DC braking current holding time after stop. It is no DC braking
process while braking time is 0.0s,which means that DC braking is invalid.DC braking is invalid if
this parameter is set 0.
F1.15 Stop detection frequency Setting range:0.00～50.00Hz Factory set:0.50Hz
Stop detection frequency:While DEC to stop, if the inverter output frequency is less than this
value, it will stop.
F1.16 ACC/DEC selection Setting range:0000~0012 Factory set:0010

F1.17 ACC start S curve time Setting range:0.00～10.00s Factory set:0.10s
F1.18 ACC finish S curve time Setting range:0.00～10.00s Factory set:0.10s
F1.19 DEC start S curve time Setting range:0.00～10.00s Factory set:0.10s
F1.20 DEC finish S curve time Setting range:0.00～10.00s Factory set:0.10s
ACC/DEC mode selections

LED “0” digit: ACC/DEC time base selection
0: max frequency The max frequency [F0.09]as the ACC/DEC time base
1: fixed frequency 50Hz 50.00Hz fixed frequency as the ACC/DEC time base
2: set frequency Given frequency as the ACC/DEC time base.If the frequency is changed
frequently,the motor ACC speed is changeable.Pay attention while apply.
LED “00” digit: S ACC/DEC selection
AC200 series inverter support 2 kinds of ACC/DEC mode;In the process of normally start、stop、
FWD/REV running、ACC/DEC;both of the two kinds of ACC/DEC mode is valid.
0: Beeline ACC/DEC Usually used for general load.
1: S Curve ACC/DEC S curve ACC/DEC mainly supports for those loads which need to slow
down the noise and vibration and decrease the start-stop impact in ACC/DEC process, or
low-frequency needs decrement torque;high frequency needs short time ACC etc.
LED “000” digit: reserved
85

S curve as follows while FWD/REV running:
ACC/DEC time will be prolong as follows after S curve is set:

ACC time = ACC time chosen + ([F1.17]+[F1.18])/2
DEC time = DEC time chosen + ([F1.19]+[F1.20])/2
Factory set:
F1.21 ACC time 2 Setting range: 0.01-650.00s
10.00s
Factory set:
F1.22 DEC time 2 Setting range: 0.01-650.00s
10.00s
Factory set:
10.00s
Factory set:
10.00s
Factory set:
10.00s
Factory set:
10.00s
ACC time 2/3/4: When [F1.16] LED“0”digit is 0, it means the time need for output frequency ACC
from 0.00Hz to max frequency [F0.09]. When [F1.16] LED“0”digit is 1, it means the time need for
output frequency ACC from 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz. Details refer to [F1.16].
DEC time 2/3/4: When [F1.16] LED “0”digit is 0, it means the time need for output frequency DEC
from max frequency [F0.09] to 0.00Hz. When [F1.16] LED “0”digit is 1, it means the time need for
output frequency DEC from 50.00Hz to 0.00Hz.Details refer to [F1.16].
ACC/DEC time 2/3/4 could only switch current ACC/DEC group(Except PLC program running)by
multi-function terminal “ACC/DEC time chosen terminal 1”and “ACC/DEC time chosen terminal 2”
on-off combination with COM.
If ACC/DEC time chosen terminal is not set,the factory default is ACC/DEC time 1 valid,and
inverter will ACC/DEC as ACC/DEC time 1.
Jog ACC/DEC time is out of this range.Jog ACC/DEC time is individually defined by[F1.39,F1.40].
ACC/DEC time table:
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 ACC/DEC time
OFF OFF ACC/DEC time 1
OFF ON ACC/DEC time 2
86
ON OFF ACC/DEC time 3

ON ON ACC/DEC time 4
If any unclear, please see FC parameter group multi steps time order fig.
Emergency stop DEC Factory set:

F1.27 Setting range: 0.01-650.00s
time 10.00s
Used for setting emergency stop DEC time.Same as ACC/DEC time definition.
During emergency stop effective period,if the multi-function output terminal is set emergency
stop,this terminal will always output effective signal in the process of emergency stop.Please refer
to [F2.45~F2.47].
F1.28 FWD&REV dead area Setting range: 0.0-120.0s Factory set: 0.0s
FWD&REV dead area: Waitting time at 0.0Hz while switch between FWD/REV. It sets for
equipment with machine dead area while big inertia load and change direction.
Zero speed torque frequency

threshold
F1.30 Zero speed torque coefficient Setting range:0.0～150.0% Factory set:60.0%
F1.31 Zero speed hold torque time Setting range:0.0-6000.0s Factory set:0.0s
Zero speed torque function enter condition judgement:

1. While inverter start and ACC,if the frequency given is less than the start
frequency,inverter output is 0,but doesn’t enter into 0 speed torque function,
2. While inverter start and ACC,if the frequency given is no more than 0 speed torque
frequency threshold, the output frequency is 0Hz,and enter into 0 speed torque function.If
the frequency given is more than the threshold,inverter doesn’t enter into 0 speed torque
hold function.
3. While inverter normally running FWD/DEC switch, if the output frequency is less than
[F1.29],inverter will output 0Hz,and enter into 0 speed torque function.When the 0 speed
torque hold time[F1.31]is more than FWD&REV dead area[F1.28],the hold time is decided by
FWD&REV dead area[F1.28].
4. While inverter is normally running, in the process of changing frequency setting value to
control ACC/DEC,if DEC to[F1.29],the inverter will output 0 frequency, and enter into 0
speed torque function and exit this function after 0 speed torque hold time.
5. While inverter stop DEC process, if the output frequency is less than 0 speed torque
frequency threshold[F1.29],inverter doesn’t enter the 0 speed torque function and normally
DEC to stop.If stop DC braking start frequency is more than [F1.29],when the output
frequency is less than stop DC braking start frequency,inverter enter into stop DC braking
state.
0 speed torque hold coefficient: Valid under open-loop V/F or open-loop VC control and set the
output torque at 0 speed.100% corresponds to motor rated current.Under closed-loop control
87
mode,0speed torque value is decided by motor load. While using, if the torque is set too big or of
long duration,pay attention to motor cooling.
0 speed torque hold time:Set the hold time of inverter entering 0 speed torque. Inverter starts
timing when the operation frequency is 0Hz,and stops output when time reaches the 0 speed
torque hold time set.The effective timing is 0~5999.9S.Inverter times following the set time when
parameters are set within the effective timing and stops 0 speed hold torque after the timing is
finished.
Note: Pay attention to the motor temperature rise when 0 speed hold torque is set too big or
of long duration. Install motor cooling equipment to improve the motor heat dissipation if
the temperature rise is too high.
Power off restart action

selection
Power off restart
waiting time
Power off restart operation selection

0: invalid Only run with order power on again.While keyboard control, RS485 communication
control or optional card control, automatic clear running order while power off.
1: Valid If inverter is at run state before power off, it start automatically after [F1.36] waiting time.
While waiting, it does not accept any orders. But if stop order, it will not restart.Power off restart
waiting time [F1.36] setting principle:Accord to rework waiting time of the equipment related to
inverter when power on again.
Note: It can make machine automatic re-start while power recovers. Therefore, there is a
great contingency.Please use it carefully.
F1.37 Reserved
88
JOG running Setting range: 0.00-Max

F1.38 Factory set: 5.00Hz
frequency setting frequency
F1.39 JOG ACC time Setting range: 0.01-650.00s Factory set: 10.00s
F1.40 JOG DEC time Setting range: 0.01-650.00s Factory set: 10.00s
JOG running frequency setting: Set output frequency while JOG.

JOG ACC time: When [F1.16] LED“0”digit is 0, it means the time need for output frequency ACC
from 0.00Hz to max frequency [F0.09]. When [F1.16] LED“0”digit is 1, it means the time need for
output frequency ACC from 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz. Details see [F1.16].
JOG DEC time: When [F1.16] LED “0”digit is 0, it means the time need for output frequency DEC
from max frequency [F0.09] to 0.00Hz. When [F1.16] LED “0”digit is 1, it means the time need for
output frequency DEC from 50.00Hz to 0.00Hz.
Jog frequency has the highest priority(terminal jog),which means that once that the jog command is
valid at any state,inverter runs with the jog ACC/DEC time from current running frequency to jog
frequency.Jog ACC/DEC time is defined as ACC/DEC time,and inverter jog could be controlled by
jog command of keyboard、control terminal、communication command and option card.
Note: JOG run frequency set is only limited by [F0.09]. While JOG frequency setting is
bigger then [F0.11] upper limitation, actual JOG output frequency is limited by upper
limitation. Only terminal JOG priority is not limited by run order channels. Other JOG
orders have priority only while the channel is the same as others. Such as keyboard
JOG is only valid under keyboard control.
Factory set:
F1.41 Jump frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00-Max frequency
0.00Hz
Jump frequency range Factory set:
F1.42 Setting range: 0.00-Max frequency
1 0.00Hz
Factory set:
F1.43 Jump frequency 2 Setting range: 0.00-Max frequency
0.00Hz
Jump frequency range Factory set:
F1.44 Setting range: 0.00-Max frequency
2 0.00Hz
While inverter is running with load,to avoid machine load resonance point, the output frequency
could be set jump frequency.Inverter could set 2 jump points to carry out the jump operation, and
the output frequency would adjust automatically to beyond the range of resonance point to avoid
running at this point after setting the jump frequency, even that the frequency given is within the
resonance point range.
Jump frequency processed as follows in ACC/DEC process:
89
Note: Output frequency will through jump frequency area while ACC/DEC.
9.3 Quantum digital terminal functions

Multifunction input terminal
F2.00 Factory set:1
1(X1)
F2.01 Factory set:2
2(X2)
F2.02 Factory set:4
3(X3)
F2.03 Setting range: 0-63 Factory set:5
4(X4)
F2.04 Factory set:6
5(X5)
F2.05 Factory set:8
6(X6)
F2.06 Factory set:0
7(X7)
Machine has seven multifunction terminals(X1-X7) which can be defined by [F2.00-F2.06]. And
trait and filter time can be defined by [F2.08-F2.23]. Details refer to [F2.08-F2.23].X7 and high
speed impulse input PUL use the same external input terminal X7/PUL.While function code
chooses PUL given, external terminal is used as PUL input,otherwise,used as X7 input.For
example,X7/PUL will be used as PUL input when [F2.06]=0,and at this time ,switch signal input is
not accepted.
As multifunction terminal has many functions,please set and choose according to the requirement.
Setting and function table:
setting setting setting setting
0 No function( can choose again) 32 ACC/DEC time selection terminal 1
1 FWD 33 ACC/DEC time selection terminal 2
2 REV 34 ACC/DEC pause
3 3 line run control(Xi) 35 Swing frequency devotion
4 FWD JOG 36 Swing frequency pause
5 REV JOG 37 Swing frequency reset
90
6 Free stop 38 Reserved

7 Emergency stop 39 Reserved
8 Fault reset 40 Timer touch terminal
9 Out fault input 41 Timer clear terminal
10 Frequency (UP) 42 Counter clock input terminal
11 Freuqncy (DW) 43 Counter clear terminal
12 (UP/DW clear ) 44 DC brake order
13 Channel A switch to Channel B 45 Pre-excitation order terminal
Frequency channel combination
14 46 Motor select terminal
switch to channel A
Frequency channel combination
15 47 Reserved
switch to channel B
16 Multi steps terminal 1 48 Command channel switch to keyboard
17 Multi steps terminal 2 49 Command channel switch to terminal
Command channel switch to
18 Multi steps terminal 3 50
communication
19 Multi steps terminal 4 51 Command channel switch to option card
20 PID control cancel 52 Run banned
21 PID control pause 53 FWD banned
22 PID trait switch 54 REV banned
23 PID parameter switch 55 Reserved
24 PID given switch 1 56 Reserved
27 PID feedback switch 1 59 Reserved
28 PID feedback switch 2 60 Speed torque control switch
29 PID feedback switch 3 61 Position control switch
30 PLC pause 62 Reserved
31 PLC restart 63 Reserved
0: No function This terminal invalid.If the function terminal is idle,it is recommended to be set 0,to
avoid the misoperation.
1: FWD While run order is given by terminal, and [F2.26] is set as 2 line 1, and terminal is valid,
inverter will FWD. Other control mode refer to [F2.26].
2: REV While run oder is given by terminal, and [F2.26] is set as 2 line 1, and terminal is valid,
inverter will REV. Other control mode refer to [F2.26].
3: 3 line run control (Xi) While run oder is given by terminal, and [F2.26] is set as 3 line 1/2, it is 3
line run control (Xi). Details refer to [F2.26].
4: FWD JOG
5: REV JOG
FWD/REV command input port.When this terminal is valid,inter jog runs.Terminal jog command
has the highest priority.JOG refer to details [F1.38-F1.40].
6: Free stop Free stop command input port.While it is valid, inverter stops output. Motor will free
run.While free stop terminal is always valid, inverter does not accept any start order and keep stop
state. Whether recover to original order after free stop order is relieved while terminal 2 line control
91
running, refer to [F2.27] please. It does not recover to original order after free stop order is relieved
while keyboard, RS485,optional card and terminal 3 line control running. If need start inverter, it
needs to input run order again.
7: Emergency stop If input emergency stop order while running, inverter DEC and stop according
[F1.27] DEC time setting. Details refer to [F1.27]. It can not run again before totally stopping. While
[F1.10] is set as free stop, emergency stop order and free stop order is same function. Once this
terminal is valid, inverter stops output and free stop immediately. If emergency stop terminal is
always valid, inverter does not accept start order and keep stop. Under 2 line control mode,
whether recover original run order after relieve emergency stop order is decided by [F2.27].
Not recover original order under keyboard, RS485, optional card and terminal 3 line control mode.
If need start inverter, please input order again.
Note: Suddenly DEC could lead to over-voltage fault.When there is over-voltage

fault,inverter will cut off output and motor will be in free running state,which leads to
the motor out of control.Hence,while use emergency stop function, please set right
[F1.27] DEC time or work with energy brake function.
8: Fault reset While inverter fault with alarm,it could reset the fault through this terminal.While
inverter is under 2 lines control running mode Whether recover orginal order after fault reset is
decided by [F2.27].
9: Out fault input Inverter fault monitors and protects external equipments while accept exterior
fault input signal by it. After receiving external fault input signal,motor free run and display
malfunction information E.EF.
10: Frequency (UP)
11: Frequency (DW)
12: (UP/DW clear)
Achieve given frequency UP/DW though control terminal,and terminal UP/DW control is valid only
when [F0.03] is set”7”.Set memory and clear mode after UP/DW change the frequency by
[F2.36];details refer to [F2.36].The rate of ACC/DEC rate of terminal UP/DW controlling given
frequency is set by [F2.37].
UP/DW given frequency can be cleared by UP/DW clear terminal at any time.
92
13: channel A switch to channel B

14: Frequency combination channel switch to channel A
15: Frequency combination channel switch to channel B
Switch by the combination of frequency given channel
16: Multi steps terminal 1
Multi-step speed command input port,coding combination to achieve 15 steps speed.Multi-step
speed command has the second priority to jog command.See parameter details of multi steps and
FC group of PLC.
20: PID control cancel While [F0.03] is set as 8 and this terminal is valid, it can make PID function
be invalid. Main frequency given channel give 0.00Hz. While this terminal is invalid, PID re-count
frequency given of main channel.
21: PID control pause While PID given and this terminal is valid, it can make PID adjustment be
invalid and keep frequency not change. PID re-count frequency given of main channel.
22: PID trait switch While [F0.03] is set as 8 and this terminal is valid, [Fb.07] LED “0” digit-trait
setting will be changed. PID output trait back to [Fb.07] LED “0” digit-trait setting.
23: PID parameter switch While PID parameter switch condition [Fb.17] is set”1”, this terminal
selection is valid.When this function is invalid,PID adjustment proportion 、 integral 、 differential
parameter is [Fb.11~Fb.13],and be [Fb.14~Fb.16] when invalid.
24: PID given switch 1
While PID controller give signal source [Fb.00] is set as 8, give signal source channel can be
switched by this group of terminals. Details see [Fb.00].
27: PID feedback switch 1
While PID controller feedback signal source [Fb.03] is set as 8, feedback signal source channel
can be switched by this group of terminals. Details refer to [Fb.03].
30: PLC pause While [F0.03] is 9, this valid signal can make PLC pause and inverter output
current frequency. Inverter go on as before while this signal disappears. See parameter details of
93
multi steps and FC group of PLC.

31: PLC restart While [F0.03] is 9, this valid signal can make PLC start from the 1st step again at
stop state or running. See parameter details of multi steps and FC group of PLC.
32: ACC/DEC time selection terminal 1
33: ACC/DEC time selection terminal 2
ACC/DEC time selection command input port,coding combination to achieve 4 steps ACC/DEC
selection.ACC/DEC time selection terminal 1 is defaulted as valid while not set parameter and
terminal invalid. Details see [F1.21-F1.26].
34: ACC/DEC pause In ACC/DEC process, if it is valid, inverter stop ACC/DEC and keep the
speed.
35: Swing devotion: While under swing control,if set manual devotion,the swing function is valid
when this terminal is valid and inverter stars swing running.
36: Swing pause: While under swing control, inverter keeps current frequency if this terminal is
valid. The swing frequency is recovered after canceling the terminal command.Details refer to
[FC.49~FC.55].
37: Swing reset: While under swing control, inverter returns centrals frequency if this terminal is
valid. Details refer to [FC.49~FC.55].
ON ON
AC C /D EC pause
ON
run order
give frequency
outputfrequency
pause pause
AC C /D EC pause
38: Reserved
39: Reserved
40: Timer touch terminal Port to star timer starting timing.Closed is valid.Detail refer to
[F2.39-F2.40].
41: Timer clear terminal Clear timer timing record . Instant closed is valid.Detail refer to
[F2.39-F2.40].
42: Counter clock input terminal Clock input terminal of counter function. Detail refer to
[F2.41-F2.42].
43: Counter clear terminal Clear counter record and closed is valid.Detail refer to [F2.41-F2.42].
44: DC brake order At stop state, it can start DC brake function.Details refer to [F1.12]. If input run
order or JOG order, DC braking will be stopped.
94
45: Pre-excitation order terminal Only valid under asynchronous VC control. At stop state, it
can start pre-excitation function. If input run order or JOG order, pre-excitation order is cancelled.
46: Reserved
47: Reserved
48: Command channel switch to keyboard
49: Command channel switch to terminal
50: Command channel switch to communication
51: Command channel switch to expansion card
Command channel switch terminal can switch to 4 kinds of command given,The priority from high
to low is keyboard、terminal、communication、expansion card.
52: Run banned
53: FWD banned
54: REV banned
While run banned terminal selection is valid, run command is valid at stop and free stop at running
state.
While FWD banned terminal selection is valid, FWD running command is valid at stop and free stop
at running state.
While REV banned terminal selection is valid, REV running command is valid at stop and free stop
at running state.
55: Reserved
56: Reserved
57: Reserved
58: Reserved
59: Reserved
60: Speed torque control switch
Only be valid under VC control mode, and switch to torque control when the terminal control is
valid.
61: Position control switch
Only be valid under closed-loop VC control mode, and switch to position control mode when the
terminal control is valid.The priority of terminal is higher than speed torque control switch.
62: Reserved
63: Reserved
F2.07 Reserved
95
X1-X4 terminal trait

selection
X1-X4 terminal trait selection: Set the trait of X1、X2、X3、X4 individually

LED "0”digit: X1 terminal
0: On valid
1: Off valid
LED“00”digit: X2 terminal
0: On valid
1: Off valid
LED “000”digit: X3 terminal
0: On valid
1: Off valid
LED“0000”digit: X4terminal
0: On valid
1: Off valid
X5-X7 terminal trait
selection
Terminal trait selection as above.
Factory set:
F2.10 X1 valid detected delay Setting range: 0.000-6.000s
0.010s
Factory set:
F2.11 X1 invalid detected delay Setting range: 0.000-6.000s
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
Factory set:
0.010s
96
Valid detected delay: The time delay of input terminal X1~X7 from invalid state switch to valid
state.
Invalid detected delay: The time delay of input terminal X1~X7 from valid state switch to invalid
state.
F2.26 Terminal control mode Setting range: 0-3 Factory set: 0
This parameter defines 4 kinds of external terminal control inverter running mode
0:2-line 1 Run and direction in 1,which is the most commonly used.Factory set is X1(FWD),
X2(REV) terminals decide motor forward or reverse.
frequency inverter
K1 X1
K1 K2 run order FW D order(run while close)
0 0 stop
K2 X2
1 0 FW D REV order(run while close)
0 1 REV CO M
com m on inputport
1 1 CO M
0:2-line 1
1:2-line 2 Run and direction is separate. FWD terminal X1 is run terminal. FWD terminal X2 state
decides direction.
frequency inverter
K1 K2 run order K1 X1
FW D order(run w hile close)
0 0 stop
K2 X2
1 0 FW D R EV order(run w hile close)
1 1 R EV CO M
com m on inputport
0 1 stop
1:2-line 2
2:3-line 1 Xi is stop run terminal. Run order is decided by FWD terminal X1. Direction is controlled
by REV terminal X2. Xi is valid input.
frequency inverter
SB1 SB2 X1
run order(run w hile on)
K1 direction control Xi stop order(stop w hile off)

0 FW D
K1 X2
1 REV FW D/R EV order(run w hile close)
CO M com m on inputport
2:3-line 1
3:3-line 2 Xi is stop run terminal. Run order is decided by FWD terminal X1or REV terminal X2.
Direction is controlled by both terminals.
97
frequency inverter
SB1 SB2 X1
FW D order(run w hile close)
SB3 X2
R EV order(run w hile close)
Xi
stop order(stop w hile close)
CO M com m on inputport
3:3-line 2
Note: SB1: stop button. SB2: FWD button. SB3: REV button. Xi is set as 3 multi function
input terminal 3 line control (Xi)].
Terminal operate
protection
Only valid while [F0.02] is 1 and two lines control mode ,which means that[F2.26] is set as 0 or
1.The command need to be input again in three lines control mode.
LED “0” digit: terminal operate protection when abnormal exit
0: OFF
1: ON
LED “00” digit: jog terminal operate protection when abnormal exit
0: OFF
1: ON
LED “000” digit: operate protection when command channel switch to terminal
0: OFF
1: ON
Note: While operate command channel is terminal and the control mode is two lines,inverter
will be abnormal and stop under the valid terminal running command state. When the
exception is gone,if the protection has turned off,inverter will drive motor
immediately;if the protection has turned on,it is necessary to cancel the previous
running command before response the new command and start the motor.
PUL input min

F2.30 Setting range: 0.00-50.00kHz Factory set: 0.00kHz
frequency
PUL min frequency
corresponding setting
PUL input max Factory set:
F2.32 Setting range: 0.00-50.00kHz
frequency 50.00kHz
PUL max frequency Factory set:
F2.33 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
corresponding setting 100.00%
F2.34 PUL filter time Setting range: 0.00-9.00s Factory set: 0.10s
Factory set:
F2.35 PUL end frequency Setting range: 0.000-1.000kHz
0.010kHz
98
PUL input min frequency: It defines the smallest frequency that pulse input terminal (PUL) can
accept. If smaller than this value, inverter will deal as min frequency.
PUL min frequency corresponding setting: It defines the ratio of setting value corresponding to
PUL min input frequency.
PUL input max frequency: It defines the max frequency that pulse input terminal (PUL) can
accept. If bigger than this value, inverter will deal as max frequency.
PUL max frequency corresponding setting: It defines the ratio of setting value corresponding to
PUL max input frequency.
PUL filter time: It is pulse signal filter time to eliminate disturb signal. The longer filter time is, the
stronger anti-disturb force is. The shorter filter time is, the weaker anti-disturb force is. But respond
speed will be quicker.
PUL end frequency: It is defined as smallest pulse frequency can be identified by PUL. Pulse
frequency smaller than this value can not be identified.It will be deal as 0Hz. The smaller this value
is, the smaller the pulse frequency identified by PUL is. When PUL frequency is disappear,the time
of 0Hz pulse frequency judged by inverter is longer.
UP/DW terminal
F2.36 frequency adjust Setting range: 0-2 Factory set: 0
selection
UP/DW terminal
Factory set:
F2.37 frequency add/reduce Setting range: 0.01-50.00Hz/s
0.50Hz/s
speed
UP/DW terminal frequency adjust selection

0: Power down save While UP/DW adjustment, it saves frequency records after power down or
stop. Inverter continues last UP/DW adjustment while power on.
1: Power down not save, stop save While UP/DW adjustment, it saves frequency records after
stop. Inverter continues last UP/DW adjustment while power on. it does not save frequency record
after power down. Inverter runs from 0.00Hz .
2: Valid in running, clear zero at stop While UP/DW adjustment, it does not save frequency
records after power down or stop. Inverter continues last UP/DW adjustment while power on.
Inverter UP/DW adjusts from 0.00Hz next time.
UP/DW terminal frequency increase/reduce speed: While UP/DW adjustment, it modifies

change rate of given frequency.
F2.38 Reserved
F2.39 Time unit for timer Setting range: 0-2 Factory set: 0
F2.40 Timer setting Setting range: 0-65000 Factory set: 0
99
Time unit for timer:

0: Second
1: Minute
2: Hour
Timer setting: It is used for set timing of inverter. Timer start is finished by external timer touch
terminal (select by [F2.00-F2.06]).Time begins while receiving signal. While time arriving,
corresponding output terminal (selected by [F2.45-F2.47]) outputs 1s wide pulse signal.
While touch terminal is invalid, timer keeps records and continues while touch terminal is valid
again.
Timer clear terminal can clear timer records anytime.
Note:Timer can work alone, not limited by the running state of inverter; the inverter timer
could be used in certain conditions; timing can be displayed in [C-35], the time unit decided
by [F2.39].
F2.41 Max value of counter Setting range: 0-65000 Factory set: 1000
F2.42 Setting value of counter Setting range: 0-65000 Factory set: 500
This parameter stipulates the counting action of the interior counter, clock terminal of the counter is
selected by the parameter [F2.00-F2.06].
Max value of counter: When the count value of counter for the external clock reaches the value
specified in[F2.41] , in the corresponding output terminal(selected by [F2.45-F2.47]) output a valid
signal of which the width is equal to external clock period..
Setting value of counter: When the count value of counter for the external clock reaches the
value specified in [F2.42], in the corresponding output terminal (selected by [F2.45-F2.47]) output
a valid signal; keep counting until the count value exceeds the value specified in [F2.41], which
causes the counter to be cleared, and the output valid signal would be canceled.
Counter can be clear zero anytime by multifunction terminal [F2.00-2.06].
counterreach setting value counterreach m axim um value
outputterm inal ON counterreach m axim um (F2.27)value output
ON
outputterm inal counterreach setting (F2.28)value output
Note:Counter can work alone, not limited by the running state of inverter; the inverter
counter could be used in certain conditions;the value can be displayed in [C-22].
F2.43 Reserved
100
Output terminal polarity

F2.44 Setting range: 0000~0111 Factory set: 0000
selection
LED “0” digit: Terminal Y

0: Positive
1: Negative
LED “00” digit: Relay output terminal 1
0: Positive
1: Negative
LED “000” digit: Relay output terminal 2
0: Positive
1: Negative
F2.45 Output terminal 1(Y) Factory set: 1

Relay output terminal
F2.46 Factory set: 4
1(TA1-TB1-TC1) Setting range: 0-31
Relay output
F2.47 Factory set: 11
terminal2(TA2-TB2-TC2)
0: No output This terminal is invalid ,if the terminal function is idle,it is suggested that set”0” to
avoid misoperation.
1: Running Output valid signal while inverter is running.
2: REV Output valid signal while inverter is REV running.
3:FWD Output valid signal while inverter is FWD running.
4: Fault trip alarm 1(alarm while fault self-recover) Output signal while malfunction,including
malfunction self recovery.
5: Fault trip alarm 2(no alarm while fault self-recover) Output signal while malfunction, except
malfunction self recovery.
6: Out fault stop While multi-function input terminal external malfunction signal,and inverter
displays E.EF fault,output valid signal.
7: Under voltage While inverter is under-voltage,output valid signal.
8: Finish ready for running While this signal is valid,it means that the inverter has no fault,the bus
voltage is normal,the running banned terminal such as stop or emergency stop is invalid,and can
operate after receiving start command.
9: Output frequency level test 1(FDT1)
10: Output frequency level test 2(FDT2) When the output frequency of frequency converter is
over test level [F2.51]/[F2.53] setting, it outputs valid signal after [F2.52]/[F2.54] delay frequency.
When output frequency is lower than test level, it outputs invalid signal after delay frequency.
Details see [F2.51-F2.54].
11: Frequency arrive While the output frequency closes or reaches a certain range of given
frequency(set by [F2.55],output valid signal,otherwise output invalid signal.)Details see [F2.55].
12: Run as 0 speed Output valid signal while inverter is running and output 0.00Hz.
13: Upper frequency limit arrive Output valid signal while inverter is running at the upper
frequency limit.
101
14: Lowest frequency limit arrive Output valid signal while inverter is running at the lowest
frequency limit.
15: Program running cycle finished One cycle finished, it output 500ms signal.
16: Program running step finished One step finished, it output 500ms signal.
17:PID feedback over upper limit While PID feedback arrive [Fb.27] and still over limit after
[Fb.25] delay time, it output valid signal.
18:PID feedback under lowest limit While PID feedback arrive [Fb.28] and still over limit after
[Fb.25] delay time, it output valid signal.
19: PID feedback sensor wire break Output valid signal while detecting PID feedback sensor wire
break.Details see [Fb.25-Fb.26].
20: Reserved
21: Timer time arrive While inverter inner timer reaches set time,it output 1ms impulse
signal.Details refer to[F2.39~F2.40].
22: Counter arrive biggest value While counter reaches the max value,the output terminal output
a valid signal of which the width equals to the external clock cycle,,and clear the record.Details see
[F2.41-F2.42].
23: Counter arrive setting While counter reaches the setting value,the output terminal output a
valid signal,and keeps counting until over the max value and then clear the record.Details see
[F2.41-F2.42].
24: dynamic braking Output valid signal while satisfying the dynamic braking condition. Details
see [F4.29].
25: PG feedback break Output valid signal while detecting the PG feedback break.Details see
[F5.30-F5.32].
26: Emergency stop Output valid signal while emergency stop.
27: Pre alarm output for load 1
28: Pre alarm output for load 2 While inverter is in operation and under VF control mode,the
motor output current will be regarded as the pre alarm judgment value;while under VC control
mode,the motor output torque will be used as the judgment value.The load pre alarm judgment
value will be compared with the load pre alarm detecting level to judge whether it outputs a valid
signal. Details refer to [FA.17~FA.21].
29: Reserved
30: RS485 given Through RS485 communication (0X3020/0X2020) setting,BIT 0 digit
corresponds to Y output,BIT1corresponds to relay 1 output, and BIT 2 digit corresponds to relay 2
output.
Note: Relay output terminal TA1-TC1 ,TA2-TC2 on and TB1-TC1,TB2-TC2 off is valid signal.
Y output terminal with low level is combined to (+24V) terminal to output valid signal 24V
power.
31: Reserved
Factory set:
F2.48 Y output delay time Setting range: 0.000-6.000s
0.010s
Relay1 output delay Factory set:
time 0.010s
Relay2 output delay Factory set:
time 0.010s
When the internal logic of the inverter operation is to change the Y terminal status, change after a
102
set time delay after the actual state of the output terminals Y, where in the delay time
considerations are the same as the input terminal.Relay output terminal is the same as above.
Setting range:0.00-max Factory set:

F2.51 Output frequency level 1(FDT1)
frequency 30.00Hz
F2.52 FDT1 lag
frequency 1.00Hz
F2.53 Output frequency level 1(FDT2)
frequency 50.00Hz
F2.54 FDT2 lag
frequency 1.00Hz
Frequency arrive detecting diagram

While ACC,the output arrives or higher than [F2.51]/[F2.52] setting, FDT 1/2 terminal outputs
signal after [F2.52]/[F2.54] delay frequency. While DEC the output arrives or lower than frequency
detecting level, FDT 1/2 terminal stops output signal after delay frequency.The output frequency
detecting as follows:
Given frequency reach detection Factory set:

F2.55 Setting range:0.00-50.00Hz
magnitude 2.00Hz
While output frequency arrive or approach given frequency, output terminal

Y/TA1-TB1-TC1/TA2-TB2-TC2 output valid signal if it is selected as “given frequency arriving”. This
function can used to adjust test range offset.Frequency arrive output as follows:
103
Virtual vX1terminal function

F2.60
selection
F2.61
selection
Setting range：0-63 Factory default：0
F2.62
selection
F2.63
selection
Virtual vX1-vX4 are the same in terms of function with the X1-X7 on the control panel, which can be
used as the multi-functional digital input; please refer to [F2.00-F2.06] for detailed information.
Factory default ：
F2.64 vX terminal valid state source Setting range：0000-1111
0000
LED "0”digit: virtual vX1

0: Internal connection to the virtual vY1
1: Connect with physical terminal X1
2: Function code setting whether valid
LED“00”digit: Virtual vX2
LED “000”digit: Virtual vX3
Virtual vX1 ~ vX4 input terminal status can be set in two ways, selected by [F2.64]; when the state
of vX1 ~ vX4 is determined by the state of virtual vY1 ~ vY4, whether vX1 ~ vX4 is valid or not is
depend on vY1 ~ vY4 output, and vX1 ~ vX4 and vY1 ~ vY4 are tied together.
When selecting state of vX1 ~ vX4 is set by the function code, the corresponding input terminals
can be set respectively through the function code [F2.65]
Virtual vX terminal function Factory default ：

F2.65 Setting range：0000-1111
code setting valid state 0000
LED "0”digit: virtual vX1

0: invalid.
1: valid.
0: invalid.
1: valid.
104
LED “000”digit: Virtual vX3

0: invalid.
1: valid.
0: invalid.
1: valid.
F2.66 Virtual vY1 output selection

Setting range：0-31 Factory default：0
Virtual terminals vY1 ~ vY4 output function selection with Y terminal and relay detailed description
see [F2.45-F2.47].
Setting range ： Factory default ：

F2.70 Virtual vY1output delay time
0.000-6.000s 0.010s
0.000-6.000s 0.010s
0.000-6.000s 0.010s
0.000-6.000s 0.010s
Virtual terminals vY1 ~ vY4 output delay settings with Y terminals and relay detailed description
see [F2.48-F2.50].
Virtual Terminal feature is the combination of vXi and vYi, setting Y terminal output signal as X
terminal input signal can be realized through internal vXi connecting with vYi virtual, thus saving the
actual X and Y terminals to be used in other aspects..
controlpanelX term inalY term inal controlpanelX term inalY term inal
vY vX
Y X Y X
Connecting by externalX and Y term inal Connecting by virtualterm inalinternalconnection
The following example illustrates the application of virtual vX and vY:

Example 1: cases requires the inverter ready to run when the initialization is completed, under
normal conditions an X input terminal would be used; if using a virtual terminal, the real X terminal
can be used for other inputs, as follows:
Set F0.02 = 1 Run command source terminal control;
Set F2.26 = 0 two-line control 1;
Set F2.60 = 1 terminal inputs forward run;
105
Set F2.64 = 0000 vX1 effective state is determined by vY1;

Set F2.66 = 8 output when inverter operation ready.
Inverter
vY1 connecting tovX1

F2.64 “0” digit setting
Inverter running
preparation =0
completed F2.66 vY1 =1 F2.60
vX1
=8 vY1 output
vX1 =1 FWDrunning
=0
2 line control 1 virtual terminal control
Example 2: cases requires the inverter forward run after 60s delay when the the inverter
electrified, as follows:
Set F0.02 = 1 Run command source terminal control, F2.26 = 2 Three-line control 1;
Set F2.40 =60 the timer counts 60s;
Set F2.60 = 1 vX1 terminal function input, run forward;
Set F2.61 = 3 vX2 terminal function input, three-line running control (Xi);
Set F2.62 = 40 vX3 terminal function input, timer trigger;
Set F2.64 = 0110 vX2 and vX3 active source is determined by "0”digit” and
“00”digit of F2.64;
Set F2.65 = 0110 vX2, vX3 setting is valid;
Set F2.66 = 21 vY1 output when the timer reaches.
Inverter
Running control
vY1 connecting to
vX1 F2.55 “0” digit
time reach vY1
vX3 triggers timer
output F2.61
=0
to count F2.60
Running
F2.64”000” digit =1 F2.51
=40 =21 FWD running
command =1 vX3 vY1 vX1 =1
=0 state state state =0
Stop control
F2.56”00” digit three-line control(F2.52) Stop running

vX2 =3 (stop when off)
Stop command =1
=0 state
106
Note: It can be seen from the chart when using a conventional method requires access to
two actual external X terminal, but if using virtual terminal, access to external actual
terminal is not needed.
F2.74 Reserved
F2.75 Terminal input expansion(D0) Factory default:0
Setting range:0~61
Expand D0~D5 function,the same to X1~X7 in the control board,and can be used as the
multifunction digital input.Details refer to [F2.00~F2.06].
D0~D2 terminal input

output selection
D3~D5 terminal input
output selection
D0~D2 terminal trait
selection
D3~D4 terminal trait
selection
D0~D6 expansion terminal
complex function
D0~D2 terminal input/output selection: Set the trait of multifunction input terminal D0、D1、D2
individually
LED “0” digit: D0 terminal
0: Input valid
1: Output valid
0: Input valid
1: Output valid
0: Input valid
1: Output valid
LED “0000” digit: Reserved
D3~D5 terminal input/output trait: See D0~D2 terminal input/output selection.
D0~D2 terminal trait selection: Set the trait of multifunction input terminal D0、D1、D2 individually
0: On valid
107
1: Off valid
0: On valid
1: Off valid
0: On valid
1: Off valid
D3~D5 terminal trait selection: See D0~D2 terminal trait selection.
D0~D5 expansion terminal complex function selection: Define the pins’ trait of expansion
D0~D5 individually
LED “0” digit: D0,D1 terminal
0: Invalid
1: D0,D1 as the CAN pins
LED “00” digit: D3,D4,D5 terminal
0: Invalid
1: D3,D4,D5 as the QEP pins
0: Invalid
1: D2,D3,D4,D5 as the SPI pins
F2.86 D0~D5 valid detection delay Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.010
F2.87 D0~D5 invalid detection delay Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.010
Details refer to [F2.10~F2.23]
F2.88 D0~D5 output delay time Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.010
Details refer to [F2.48~F2.50]
9.4 Analog terminal functions

Factory set:
F3.00 VS Lowest limit Setting range: 0.00-10.00V
0.00V
VS Lowest limit Factory set:
F3.01 Setting range: -100.00-100.00%
108
Factory set:
F3.02 VS upper limit Setting range: 0.00-10.00V
10.00V
VS upper limit Factory set:
F3.03 Setting range: -100.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.04 VS filter time Setting range: 0.00-6.000s
0.100s
VS zero point loop Factory set:
F3.05 Setting range: 0.00～10.00V
voltage 0.00V
VS Lowest limit: It defines signal accepted by analog input terminal (VS), Inverter deal voltage
lower than this value as lower limit.
VS lower limit corresponding setting: It defines ratio of VS lower limit.
VS upper limit: It defines signal accepted by analog input terminal (VS). Inverter deal voltage
higher than this value as higher limit.
VS upper limit corresponding setting: It defines ratio of VS upper limit.
VS filter time: It is (VS) input analog signal filter time to eliminate disturb signal. The longer filter
time is, the stronger anti-disturb force is. The shorter filter time is, the weaker anti-disturb force is.
But respond speed will be quicker.
give frequency
F0.09× F3.03 give frequency
F0.09×
F3.03
zero pointloop voltage
F3.00
F3.02 inputvoltage
F0.09×
F3.01
zero pointloop voltage
F0.09×
F3.01
F3.00 F3.02 inputvoltage
Analog frequency show

Note:While the frequency given source is set VS given,the frequency given can be set
negative value,and if corresponding with [F0.16]”000”digit selecting frequency to control
direction, the bipolar control can be carried out.
Factory set:
F3.06 AI( VS) lower limit Setting range: 0.00-10.00V
0.00V
AI(VS) lower limit Factory set:
F3.07 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.08 AI(VS) upper limit Setting range: 0.00-10.00V
10.00V
109
AI(VS) upper limit Factory set:

F3.09 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.10 AI filter time Setting range: 0.00-10.00s
0.010s
Factory set:
F3.11 AS lower limit Setting range: 0.00-20.00mA
4.00mA
AS lower limit Factory set:
F3.12 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.13 AS upper limit Setting range: 0.00-20.00mA 20.00mA
AS upper limit Factory set:
F3.14 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.15 AS filter time Setting range: 0.00-10.00s
0.010s
Factory set:
F3.16 AI( AS) lower limit Setting range: 0.00-20.00mA
4.00mA
AI(AS) lower limit Factory set:
F3.17 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
Factory set:
F3.18 AI(AS) upper limit Setting range: 0.00-20.00mA 20.00mA
AI(AS) upper limit Factory set:
F3.19 Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
See VS explain. AI (VS) indicates setting when the AI terminal input voltage analog,AI (AS)
indicates setting when the AI terminal input current analog.
VS terminal function
selection (Used as X)
Factory set:
F3.21 VS high level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
70.00%
Factory set:
F3.22 VS low level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
30.00%
AI terminal function
Factory set:
F3.24 AI high level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
70.00%
Factory set:
F3.25 AI low level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
30.00%
AS terminal function
Factory set:
F3.27 AS high level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
70.00%
Factory set:
F3.28 AS low level setting Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
30.00%
VS(AI,AS) terminal function selection has the same function to X1~X7 in the control board, and can
be used as the multi function digital input.Details refer to [F2.00~F2.06].
VS(AI,AS) high level setting:High level when the port sampling value no less than the setting
value.
110
VS(AI,AS) low level setting:Low level when the port sampling value no more than the setting
value.
After adjusting the VS port sampling value by the curve,0.00-10.00V corresponds to 0~100.00%.
After adjusting the AS port sampling value by the curve,0.00-20.00mA corresponds to 0~100.00%.
If AI is used as the voltage input, 0.00-10.00V corresponds to 0~100.00%.
If AI is used as the current input,0.00-20.00mA corresponds to 0~100.00%.
Valid state set when

F3.29 Setting range:0000~0111 Factory default: 0000
analog used as terminal
LED 0 digit: VS
0: low level
1: high level
LED 00 digit: AI
0: low level
1: high level
LED 000 digit: AS
0: low level
1: high level
LED 0000 digit: reserved
Analog input curve

F3.30 Setting range: 0000~0222 Factory default: 0000
selection
LED "0”digit: VS
LED“00”digit: AI (Select voltage/current input by the switch in the control board)
LED “000”digit: AS
0: straight line By default, usually two points straight line, please refer to the above "Analog given
frequency schematic
1: curve 1 Multi-point stitches, see function code [F3.32-F3.39] description
2: curve 2 Multi-point stitches, see function code [F3.40-F3.47] description
F3.31 Reserved
Factory default：
F3.32 Curve 1 lower limit Setting range：0.00-10.00V
0.00V
Curve 1 lower limit Factory default：
F3.33 Setting range：0.00-100.00%
Curve 1 inflection point 1 input Factory default：
F3.34 Setting range：0.00-10.00V
voltage 3.00V
Curve 1 inflection point 1 Factory default：


voltage 6.00V

Factory default：
F3.38 Curve 1 upper limit Setting range：0.00-10.00V
10.00V
111
Curve 1 upper limit Factory default：

Factory default：
F3.40 Curve 2 lower limit Setting range：0.00-10.00V
0.00V
Curve 2 lower limit Factory default：
voltage 3.00V


voltage 6.00V

Factory default：
F3.46 Curve 2 upper limit Setting range：0.00-10.00V
10.00V
Curve 2 upper limit Factory default：
Curves 1 and curve 2 can be set with two inflection points, a straight line is divided into three
sections, and each slope may not be the same, to achieve a more flexible correspondence, as
shown below:
100%
End pointinput
Inflection point2 input

corresponding setting Inflection point2
Inflection point1 input

corresponding setting Inflection point1
Analog input
Startpointinputand
corresponding setting Inflection point1 input Inflection point2 input End pointinput 10V(20m A)
-100%
If Curve 1 or Curve 2 A is selected by AS or AI (AS), current should be converted to voltage, current

and voltage settings are stating twice relations, 4mA corresponds to 2V, 20mA corresponds to 10V.
Note: [F3.32, F3.34, F3.36, F3.38] and [F3.40, F3.42, F3.44, F3.46] showed the input voltage
value should be in an increasing mode.
F3.48~
Reserved
F3.52
112
F3.53 AO output signal selection Setting range: 0000~0032 Factory set: 0000
LED”0”digit:
0: 0-10V
1: 4.00-20.00mA
2: 0.00-20.00mA
LED”00”digit:
0: 0-10V
1: 4.00-20.00mA
2: 0.00-20.00mA
3: FM Frequency pulse output
Select AO1,AO2 terminal output signal individually,voltage output or current output;AO2 can be
also selected pulse output.
Note: After output mode is selected by parameter. J1, J2, J3 ON/OFF mode need to select
according the following ways:
1. If pulse output, J1 ON.
2. If 0.00-20.00mA or 4.00-20.00mA output, J2 ON.
3. If0-10V output, J3 ON.
Factory setting is 0-10V output for both hardware and software. If need change, please
change both hardware and software.
Switch Selection
Legend function
terminal position
J1 0-50kHz frequency output
0-20mA current output

J2
4-20mA current output
J3 0-10V voltage output
F3.54 A01 output selection Factory default: 0

Setting range: 0-18
F3.55 A02 output selection Factory default:1
Used for setting inverter monitor value corresponding to multifunction terminal (AO1), (AO2) output
signal.
(AO1) output signal is decided by "0”digit of [F3.53].
(AO2) output signal is decided by “00”digit of [F3.53].
Monitor
Setting Function AO min output AO max output
value
113
Min output Max output

Give Corresponding to
0 corresponding to corresponding to max
frequency current give frequency
0.00Hz frequency
Output Corresponding to Min output Max output

1 current output corresponding to corresponding to max
frequency
frequency 0.00Hz frequency
Output Corresponding to Min output Max output
2 corresponding to corresponding to 2 times
current current output current
0.00A of rated current
Max output
Corresponding to Min output
3 Input voltage corresponding to rated
current input voltage corresponding to 0V
voltage
Max output
Output Corresponding to Min output
4 corresponding to 2 times
voltage current output voltage corresponding to
of rated voltage
Max output
Min output
Machine Corresponding to corresponding to speed
5 corresponding to 0
speed current machine speed corresponding to max
speed
frequency
Corresponding to
6 Given torque corresponding to corresponding to 200%
current output torque
0.00% torque torque
Output Corresponding to
7 corresponding to corresponding to 200%
torque current output torque
0.00% torque torque
Corresponding to
8 PID given corresponding to corresponding to 100%
current PID given
0.00% PID given PID given
PID Corresponding to
9 corresponding to corresponding to 100%
feedback current PID feedback
0.00% PID feedback PID feedback

Output Corresponding to
10 corresponding to 0 corresponding to rated
power current output power
power output power
Max output
Corresponding to Min output
11 Bus voltage corresponding to 2 times
current input voltage corresponding to 0V
rated DC voltage2
Corresponding to
12 VS input corresponding to VS corresponding to VS
current VS input
input lower limit input upper limit

Corresponding to
13 AI input corresponding to AI corresponding to AI
current AI input

Corresponding to
14 AS input corresponding to AS corresponding to AS
current AS input
Corresponding to
15 PUL input corresponding to PUL corresponding to PUL
current PUL input
114
Module Corresponding to Min output Max output

16 temperature current module corresponding to 0 corresponding to
1 temperature 1 degree module module temperature 1 is
temperature 1 100 degree
Module Corresponding to
corresponding to 0 corresponding to
17 temperature current module
degree module module temperature 2 is
2 temperature 2
temperature 2 100 degree
AO1 address
0X3021/0X2021 Min output Max output
18 RS485 given
AO2 address corresponding to 0 corresponding to 1000
0X3022/0X2022
F3.56 A01 output gain Setting range: 25.0-200.0% Factory default: 100.0%
F3.57 A01 output signal bias Setting range: -10.0-10.0% Factory default: 0.0%
F3.58 AO1 output filter Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory default: 0.010s
A01 output gain: It is used for adjusting AO1 terminal output analog value.
A01 output signal bias: It is used for adjusting AO1 terminal 0 point of output signal.
Note: AO1 output terminal includes voltage output and current output. Please select K2,when used
as 0-10V output; Please select K1,when used as 0-20mA output. All is used as 0-10V output in
factory default hardware setting.
AO1 output filter:It is AO1 output analog signal filter ability to eliminate disturb signal. The longer
filter time is, the stronger anti-disturb force is. The shorter filter time is, the weaker anti-disturb force
is. But respond speed will be quicker.
F3.59 A02 output gain Setting range: 25.0-200.0% Factory set: 100.0%
F3.60 A02 output signal bias Setting range: -100.0-100.0% Factory set: 0.0%
F3.61 AO2 output filter Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory default: 0.010s
See AO1 parameters.
A02FM frequency output Factory

Lowest limit default :0.20kHz
115
A02FM frequency output Factory

upper limit default:50.00kHz
While AO2 is set as FM frequency pulse output, it is lower limit and upper limit of the signal.
9.5 Keyboard and display parameters

Parameter and key
lock selections
0: Unlock Parameter and keyboard lock function invalid.

1: Parameter lock Lock all function parameter settings, can not modify (except theF0.08,can be
modified by UP/DW key). Can not enter into the parameter setting.Select the monitor by shift key.
All buttons in the keypad are unlocked.
2: Parameter and key lock (except FWD/STOP/JOG) Lock all parameter settings, can not enter
into the parameter setting interface and select the monitor.Can not modify. And lock all keys on
keyboard except FWD/STOP/JOG.
3: All parameter and key lock Lock all parameter settings, can not modify. And lock all keys on
keyboard except PRG.
Note:
1. 2 lines keypad unlock method: Press “PRG” and 1st line show “CodE”.And use the
“UP”-“DOWN” key to move to 2nd line,then enter password(F4.01-user password) and
press “SET” to unlock the keypad.
2. Single line keypad unlock method: Press “PRG” and show “CodE”. Press “SET” then
enter password(F4.01-user password) and press “SET” again and will be clear!
3. User password is a parameter which purpose is to protect the inverter from tampering at
will.In order to avoid bring inconvenience, please keep it confidential!
F4.01 User password Setting range: 0-9999 Factory set: 0
It used to set user password. While [F4.00] is (not 0) lock state, need input this password to unlock.
Factory set is 0.Please keep it confidential.
116
LCD keypad language

selection
Select the LCD keypad language.Only valid when using the LCD keypad.
0: Chinese
LCD keypad language is Chinese.
1: English
LCD keypad language is English.
Function parameter
copy
Set the function parameter copy. Change to 0 automatically after finishing copy.
0: No operation
1: Send machine parameters to keyboard and save Copy F0~FF parameter group to keypad
and save.
2: Send parameters saved by keyboard to machine Download the data saved in the keypad to
inverter.
Note:
1. Keyboard will not send stored parameters to inverter when inverter is running or in fault
state or no data stored in keyboard.
2. When sending data to keyboard, if keyboard is out of inverter, it will not finish copy
operation, and needs to retry it.
3. When sending data to inverter, if keyboard is out of inverter, it will not finish download
operation and needs to retry it.
4. When sending data to keyboard, current state of inverter will not be remain.And all keys
are invalid when sending data to inverter.
5. If it displays E.CEP, operation of copy parameter will be interrupted and needing to retry it.
Press PRG button to return monitor menu.
6. When software is not compatible,it shows E.EDI,and will not send data to inverter.
Keypad special
function selections
LED 0 digit: D\E monitor on

0: Off Monitor display C-XX group.Press PRG to enter.
1: On Monitor display C-XX,D-XX,E-XX.Press PRG to enter into C-XX group,and press PRG
again to enter D-XX and E-XX switch.
LED 00 digit: no keyboard potentiometer lock sampling value
0: Off Potentiometer value is sampled by DSP, and change to “0” if the keypad is pulled out.
1: On Potentiometer value is sampled by keypad,and transmit to DSP by communication.The
value is unchanged if the keypad is pulled out.
117
F4.07 REV/JOG selections Setting range: 0-1 Factory set: 0

Used to select the function of REV/JOG key.
0: REV While keyboard control, press this button, inverter reverse run. Key REV/JOG not light.
1: JOG While keyboard control, press this button, inverter JOG. Key REV/JOG light.
STOP key function

range
0: non keypad control is invalid While under non keypad control mode,the stop key in the
keypad can not be used to stop.
1: non keypad control stop by stop mode While under non keypad control mode,the stop key
in the keypad can be used as STOP key to stop.
2: non keypad control free stop While under non keypad control mode,the stop key in the
keypad can be used as STOP key to free stop.
Note: While valid to terminal order or communication order, inverter is in stop lock state
after press STOP key under terminal control or RS485 control. If inverter needs to restart,
stop oder needs to be given by selected order channel to unlock stop state firstly.
UP/DOWN key Factory set:

F4.09 Setting range: 0000-0212
modification selections 0011
LED “0” digit: keyboard UN/DOWN key modify selection

0: Invalid UP/DOWN key can not modify parameters.
1: Modify frequency setting by key board numbers (F0.08) UP/DOWN key can modify
parameters [F0.08].
2: Modify PID given setting by key board numbers (Fb.01) UP/DOWN key can modify
parameters [Fb.01].
LED “00” digit: keyboard UP/DOWN key store selection
0: No save after power down
1: Save after power down
It is used to select whether save the parameter modified by UP/DOWN key while power cut.
LED “000” digit: operation limit
0: Operation stop for adjusting
1: Adjusting only in operation, stop for holding
2: Adjusting in operation, stop for clearing
Keyboard potentiometer
F4.10 Setting range: 0.00-5.00V Factory set: 0.50V
lowest limit
F4.11 lowest limit Setting range: 0.00-100.00% Factory set: 0.00%
F4.12 Setting range: 0.00-5.00V Factory set: 4.50V
upper limit
Factory set:
F4.13 upper limit corresponding Setting range: 0.00-100.00%
100.00%
setting
118
Keyboard potentiometer lowest limit: It defines the lower limit of the signal gived by potenmeter.
Inverter treat the voltage lower than this value as the lower limit signal.
Keyboard potentiometer lowest limit corresponding setting: It sets ratio of keyboard

potentiometer lower limit.
Keyboard potentiometer upper limit: It defines the upper limit of the signal given by
potentiometer.Inverter treat the voltage higher than this value as the lower limit signal.
Keyboard potentiometer upper limit corresponding setting: It set ratio of keyboard

potentiometer upper limit.
The display content of the first

line while run
line while run
line while stop
line while stop
The display content of the first line while run: Set monitor content showed in the first line of
LED while running. The content can be modified by “SET” key while running. Not save modification
while power cut. Default to display LED “0” digit setting after power on.
The display content of the first line while stop: Set monitor content showed in the upper line of
LED while stop. The content can be modified by “SET” key while stop. Not save modification while
power cut. Default to display LED “0” digit setting after power on.
The content LED “0” digit to “0000” digit setting is the same to C monitor number
The display content of the

second line while run
second line while run
second line while stop
second line while stop
Only valid for keyboard with 2 line LED. Details refer to [F4.14-F4.17].
Keyboard display
selections
119
LED “0” digit: output frequency selection

0: Aim frequency Display the aim frequency of current control motor
1: Actual frequency Display the output frequency of inverter
LED“00” digit: Reserved
LED“000” digit: Power display dimension To correct the output frequency of C-10.Can select
the unit of the power
0: Power display ratio (%) Display the ratio of output power,100% corresponds with the rated motor
power.
1: Power display Kilowatt (KW) Display the actual power
LED“0000” digit: reserved
F4.23 Reserved
Rotate speed display Factory set:

F4.24 Setting range: 0.0-500.0%
coefficient 100.0%
It sets the display coefficient of keyboard monitor item “machine speed” .100% is corresponding to
motor rated speed.
Power display Factory set:
coefficient 100.0%
F4.26 Alarm selection 1 Setting range: 0000~0001 Factory set: 0
LED “0” digit: E.EEP fault (EEPROM store fault)

0: Alarm and free stop
1: Alarm and continue operation
F4.27 Reserved
F4.28 Fan control Setting range: 0-2 Factory default：1
Select fan run mode.

0: Fan run after electrify No matter temperature of module is high or not, fan runs when inverter
power on.
1: Fan stop related to temperature Work when running. When inverter stops, fan runs when
module temperature is over 50 degree and stops 30 seconds after module temperature is lower
than standard. When inverter runs, fan runs after 1s.
2: Fan stop when machine stop, run related to temperature When inverter runs, fan runs when
module temperature is over 50 degree and stops 30seconds after module temperature is lower
than standard. When inverter stops, fan stops after 30s.
Note: This function can prolong fan life.
dynamic braking
F4.29 Setting range: 0~1 Factory default：0
enabled
Used for the motor dynamic braking enabled

120
0: OFF Inverter doesn’t dynamic braking to control the motor,no matter the bus voltage.
1: ON Inverter dynamic braking to control the motor,while the bus voltage is over the dynamic
braking act voltage.
dynamic braking Factory default ：

F4.30 Setting range: 115.0-140.0%
operation voltage 120.0%
dynamic braking operation voltage: Inverter dynamic braking begins when DC bus voltage rises
and exceeds [F4.30]. It is only valid for inverter with inner braking parts. Inverters under
AC200-T3-018G have build in braking parts. AC200-S2-3R7G and inverters under than that with
220V input have built-in braking parts. All inverters do not have braking resistance. If need dynamic
braking, please use optional resistance.
Note: When use the dynamic braking function,please turn off the vervoltage suppression
function,otherwise overvoltage suppression is possible to suppress the rise of the bus
voltage, thus the brake operation point can’t be reached.
F4.31 Reserved
PWM Carrier
F4.32 Setting range: 0.7-16.0kHz Factory default:model set
frequency
It is used to set IGBT frequency. Please set this parameter when adjusting electromagnetic noise
and reducing leakage current. This feature is mainly used to improve noise and vibration during
operation of the inverter. At higher carrier frequency of the current wave, the motor noise would be
small. It is suitable for locations that need mute environment when run in high carrier frequency, but
at the same time the main parts switch loss and the heat are heavy while the efficiency would be
reduced. In the meantime, radio disturbance is heavy. And the other problem is that capacitance
leak current would increase, and if there is leak protection, there may be mistake action or over
current. When run in low carrier frequency, the case will be totally different. Different motors would
have different carrier frequency responses. The best carrier frequency comes with adjustment
based on actual case. The bigger the capacity, the smaller the carrier frequency should be.
The Company reserves the right to limit maximum carrier frequency.
Carrier Radiator
Motor noise Electric disturbance
frequency temperature
low big Small low
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
high small big high
Note: We advice ratio of carrier frequency to max frequency not lower than 36. If work under
low frequency long time, we advice reduce carrier frequency to reduce the dead area
time impact.
Attention: when carrier frequency is higher than the factory default, the rated power would
reduce 5% every time when carrier frequency adds 1 KHz.
F4.3 Setting range: Factory default:

PWM control mode
3 0000-1111 1111
121
LED “0” digit: carrier temperature associated settings

0: associated module temperature is invalid
1: associated module temperature is valid
When module temperature is too high, the frequency inverter reduces carrier frequency
automatically, which can reduce switch loss and avoid frequent alarm for over heat.
LED “00” digit: associated settings of carrier output frequency
0: associated frequency output temperature is invalid
1: associated frequency output temperature is valid
When carrier frequency is related to frequency output, it can automatic adjust carrier frequency
according to frequency output, which can improve the low frequency performance and high
frequency mute effect.
LED “000” digit: random PWM valid
0: banned: Noise frequency is fixed.
1: valid: This mode allows the inverter output voltage harmonic spectrum evenly distributes over a
wide frequency range, which can effectively suppress electrical noise and mechanical vibration.
LED “0000”: PWM modulation mode select PWM mode
0: Only use the three-phase modulation
1: Switch automatically between two phase and three phase modulation
9.6 Motor parameters

F5.00 Motor selection Setting range: 0~1 Factory set: 0
Motor selection: Only read the parameter,indicating the current motor type.Decided by [F0.00]
motor control mode.
0: Asynchronous motor (AM)
1:Synchronous motor (PM)
F5.01 Motor poles Setting range: 2-98 Factory set: 4
Set the poles of the motor.Set it according to nameplate.
F5.02 Motor rated power Setting range: 0.1-1000.0kW Factory set: model set
Set it according to nameplate based on unit of 0.1kw. While motor rated power setting is changed,
inverter will automatic adjust [F5.03-F5.11] to default. If self-study, [F5.07-F5.11] will automatic
change according to the result of self study. If need high accuracy control, It must self study after
right [F5.01-F5.06] setting.
Setting range: 0.01Hz-max

F5.03 Motor rated frequency Factory set: model set
frequency
Set it according to nameplate.
F5.04 Motor rated speed Setting range: 1-65000rpm Factory set: model set
122
F5.05 Motor rated voltage Setting range: 1-1500V Factory set: model set
F5.06 Motor rated current Setting range: 0.1-3000.0A Factory set: model set
F5.07 Motor no-load current Setting range: 0.01-650.00A Factory set: model set
Motor stator
F5.08 Setting range: 0.01-50.00% Factory set: model set
resistance
F5.09 Motor rotor resistance Setting range: 0.01~50.00% Factory set: model set
Motor stator&rotor
F5.10 Setting range:0.01~50.00% Factory set: model set
inductance
Motor stator&rotor
F5.11 Setting range: 0.1-2000.0% Factory set: model set
mutual inductance
Asynchronous motor model parameters.[F5.07~F5.11 ]will adjust automatically while set

[F5.20]parameter self-study.No self-study if the accurate motor parameter is known，and then input
the parameters manually.
Synchronous machine Factory default：Model

stator resistance set
Synchronous machine Setting range： Factory default：Model
F5.13
d-axis inductance 0.01mH-400.00% set
Synchronous machine Setting range： Factory default：Model
F5.14
q-axis inductance 0.01mH-400.00% set
F5.15 Setting range：1V-1500V
back electromotive force set
PMSM model parameters, of which the back electromotive force represents the voltage measured
between lines when the motor rotor speed is set to the rated frequency speed; motor model
parameters will automatically identify and modify in the motor parameter self-tuning. Wherein,
[F5.15] will be recognized only in a rotating auto-tuning.

F5.16 Setting range：0.0°-360.0°
encoder installation angle set
When synchronous machines are running VC with PG (F0.00 = 7), this parameter is required to
detect the magnetic pole position of the rotor. This parameter can be automatically identified and
modified during the rotating auto-tuning, and generally it does not need adjustment.
Parameters
F5.20 self-adjustment Setting range: 0-2 Factory set: 0
selections
0: No operation Set as default without self study.

123
1: Rotary type self-study Before self adjustment, [F5.01-F5.06] of asynchronous motor which is
controlled must be set as right value. While self adjustment, firstly, asynchronous motor at static
state, it automatic detects motor stator resistance, motor rotor resistance, motor stator&rotor
inductance.Then the asynchronous motor at rotate state, it automatic detects motor no-load
current, motor stator&rotor mutual inductance. All results will be auto wrote in the corresponding
code and renewed while adjustment is over. After parameter setting, press FWD key to start self
study, keyboard LED display “t-01”. Motor automatic stop while self adjustment is over.Inverter
return to standby state.
2: Resting type self-study Before self adjustment, [F5.01-F5.06] of motor which is controlled
must be set as right value. While self adjustment, motor at static state, it automatic detects motor
stator resistance, motor rotor resistance, motor stator&rotor inductance. All results will be auto
wrote in the corresponding code and renewed while adjustment is over. After parameter setting,
press FWD key to start self study, keyboard LED display “t-02”.FWD indicator is off while self
adjustment is over.Inverter return to standby state.
Note: [F5.20] is automatic set as 0 after self adjustment.
Attention:
1. Before set ting [F5.20] as 1 –self study, unload the motor firstly.
2. In some occasions (such as can not unload), if it is not convenient to rotary
self-study,static self study is also OK.
3. If user know the right parameter. User can set [F5.01-F5.11] directly.
4. Ensure stop state before starting self study, otherwise, self study can not be normal.
5. While [F5.20]is 1, if there is over voltage or over current in self study process, ACC/DEC
time [F0.14,F0.15] can be prolonged.
6. If self study is not successful, alarm E.tE1 fault.
Synchronous machine poles
F5.21 Setting range：0000~0012 Factory default：0010
searching function
LED “0” digit: closed-loop vector

0: OFF
1: ON
2: On, only operate firstly when electrify
LED “00” digit: open-loop vector
0: OFF
1: ON
2: ON, only operate firstly when electrify
While synchronous motor control is valid,the initial position of the motor rotor can be obtained when
starting by the poles searching function..Under the closed-loop VC control,if the motor coder has
not self-study the initial position,then the start initial position can be obtained by this function.Under
open-loop control,obtaining the initial position guarantees the motor has a big force and no REV
running while starting.
For synchronous closed-loop control using ABZ coder,the motor poles is unknown before detecting
Z pulse.Hence, it is suggested to turn on the poles searching function to guarantee the stable start
process and no REV running.
124
Speed feedback or encoder Factory default:

F5.30 Setting range: 0000-1111
type 0000
LED “0” digit: encoder type: set encoder type according to the encoders actually selected.
0: Normal ABZ encoder
1: Rotary encoder
LED “00” digit: encoder direction: When motor speed direction and encoder speed direction is
inconsistent, switch direction by setting the parameter.
0: same direction;
1: opposite direction
LED “000” digit: disconnection detection: when the break detection is turned on, the inverter
would report encoder failure and stop when encoder disconnection is found.
0: OFF
1: ON
LED“0000”digit:Z pulse correction enabled
0: OFF
1: ON
F5.31 ABZ encoder lines Setting range: 0-10000 Factory default:1024
ABZ encoder lines: used to set output pulse of speed feedback sensor every cycle; please set
correctly according to the sensor specification.
Setting range: Factory default:

F5.32 PG line-break detection time
0.100-60.000s 2.000s
PG line-break detection time: used to confirm sensor disconnection delay time when the sensor
break detection setting is valid; set 0sec as the off function of line-break detection.
F5.33 Rotary encoder poles Setting range：2-128 Factory default：2
Rotary encoder poles: Set according to actual selection of rotary encoder, usually 2-pole resolver
Encoder transmission ratio

F5.34 Setting range：1~32767 Factory default:1
numerator
Encoder transmission ratio
F5.35 Setting range：1~32767 Factory default:1
denominator
If the motor encoder is not installed in the motor shaft,it could obtain the motor speed and position
indirectly through the transmission setting to achieve closed-loop VC function.The premise is that
the motor shaft and encoder is rigid connection.While under synchronous motor controls,the
encoder lines converted to motor shaft could not be much less.
First-order filter of encoder Factory default ：

F5.36 Setting range：0.0-100.0ms
speed inspection 1.0ms
125
Promote the filter time properly if the motor encoder feedback noise is too big, but prolonging the
filtering time will decrease system response performance.In some occasions with higher
requirements on response performance, if the filter time is too long,it will lead to system oscillation.
F5.37-F5.4
Reserved
9
9.7 VC control parameter

F6.00 ASR proportional gain 1 Setting range: 0.01-100.00 Factory set: 10.00
F6.01 ASR integral time 1 Setting range: 0.000-6.000 Factory set: 0.500
F6.02 ASR filter time1 Setting range: 0.0-0.100.0ms Factory set: 0.0ms
F6.03 ASR switch frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00-max frequency Factory set: 0.00Hz
F6.04 ASR proportional gain 2 Setting range: 0.01-100.00 Factory set: 10.00
F6.05 ASR integral time 2 Setting range: 0.000-6.000 Factory set: 0.500
F6.06 ASR filter time 2 Setting range: 0.0-0.100.0ms Factory set: 0.0ms
F6.07 ASR switch frequency 2 Setting range: 0.00-max frequency Factory set: 5.00Hz
ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time adjustment: System response will be quicker by
increase proportional gain. But if proportional gain is too big, there is surge easily. System
response will be quicker by decreasing integral time. But if integral time is too short, there is surge
easily. Usually, adjust proportional gain firstly, then adjust integral time.
Note: If ASR proportional gain is too big and ASR integral time is too small, over voltage
maybe caused while system start to high speed quickly (without extra braking resistance or
braking unit). It is caused by reborn energy feedback and can be avoided by adjust ASR
proportional gain bigger and ASR integral time smaller.
ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time adjustment at high/low speed: Set ASR switch
frequency [F6.03] and [F6.07] while it has quick response requirement for load at high/low speed.
Usually increase proportional gain and decrease integral time to improve response at low
frequency running. Usually adjust as this: Set right [F6.03] and [F6.07]. The first group of ASR
parameter is valid while output frequency is under switch frequency 1 [F6.04]. The second group of
ASR parameter is valid while output frequency is between switch frequency 1 [F6.03] and switch
frequency 2 [F6.07]. Parameter linearly transits from switch frequency 1 [F6.03] to switch
frequency 2 [F6.07] pro rate. Adjust ASR proportional gain 2[F6.04] and ASR integral time2 [F6.05]
at low speed to ensure no surge and good response. Adjust ASR proportional gain 1 [F6.00] and
ASR integral time 1[F6.01] at high speed to ensure no surge and good response.
While the switch frequency1[F6.03] is set 0,just use the first group ASR parameter.
Setting range：0.0～
F6.14 Electric motor torque limit Factory default：180.0%
250.0%
Setting range：0.0～
F6.15 Power generation torque limit Factory default：180.0%
250.0%
126
Set the motor torque output upper limit,.Ratio corresponds to the motor rated torque,
asynchronous machine, synchronous machine open-loop, closed-loop VC valid. The torque output
of the motor is also limited by the inverter output current limit [FA.01] and the output power [F6.27].
Details refer to the code specification
Electrical loop D-axis Factory default ：

F6.10 proportional gain Setting range：0.001-4.000
1.000
Electrical loop D-axis integral Factory default ：
F6.11 gain Setting range：0.001-4.000
1.000
Electrical loop Q-axis Factory default ：
F6.12 Setting range：0.001-4.000
proportional gain 1.000
Electrical loop Q-axis integral Factory default ：
F6.13 gain Setting range：0.001-4.000
1.000
Set the PI parameters under AM/PM VC control. While under VC control, if there is instability like
speed surge or current surge, the respective gain may be appropriately reduced to realize stability;
at the same time, increasing gain helps to improve motor dynamic response.
Vector control motor slip Factory default ：

compensation 100.0%
Vector control generator slip Factory default ：
compensation 100.0%
The PM VC control is valid. While under open-loop VC control, the slip compensation coefficient is
used to adjust the motor speed stabilization accuracy. When the motor speed is lower than the set
value with load, the motor speed is increased, and vice verse.
While under closed loop VC control, this value is used to adjust the output torque of the motor and
the output current of the linearity.When the motor is with rated load and the motor current is larger
than the nameplate rated standard deviation,if it is larger then reduce the value,and it it is too small
then increase the value
.
F6.18 position compensation control Setting range:0~1 Factory default：0
F6.19 Compensation gain Setting range:0.0~250.0% Factory default: 10.0%
F6.20 Compensation limit Setting range:0.0~100.0% Factory default：0.1%
F6.21 Compensation effective range Setting range:0.0~100.0% Factory default: 10.0%
Closed-loop VC control is valid.It can achieve zero servo function at zero speed,and in zero speed
operation it can increase the rigidity of the motor. After the compensation control is enabled, the
compensation gain is used to adjust the extent of the compensation.The compensation limit is
used for limiting compensation extent, relative to the maximum output frequency and valid within
the compensation range of frequency.
F6.22 Over excitation braking gain Setting range：0.0-500.0% Factory default：100.0%
Over excitation braking
F6.23 Setting range：0.0~250.0% Factory default：100.0%
amplitude limit
127
AM VC control is valid,.The over excitation function can realize much more quickly DEC control
and no over-voltage. The higher over excitation is, the faster response is. Braking limit corresponds
to motor rated excitation,the greater limit is, the better braking effect is. However, the excessive
limit will make the motor temperature rise when DEC.Only in good heat radiation condition ,this
value can be properly increased .
Vector control energy

F6.24 Setting range：0~1 Factory default：0
saving function
F6.25 Energy saving control gain Setting range：0.0~80.0% Factory default：50.0%
Energy saving control
F6.26 Setting range：0.000~6.000s Factory default：0.010s
low-pass filter
PM VC control is valid.While under energy saving operation,it can decrease the output current
automatically by analyzing the torque output,to reduce the motor heating loss to save energy.
Motor constant
F6.27 power area power Setting range: 0.0-250% Factory set: 150.0%
limit
While under VC control,it can control the output power of motor shaft.If the motor runs at
low/middle speed, the motor output power is lower.At this time,the motor torque is limited by the
motor/generator torque[F6.08~F6.09].If the motor runs at high speed or above the rated speed,the
output power is limited by [F6.27],and the output torque decrease inversely with the speed.
Motor weak magnetic current

upper limit
Motor weak magnetic feed
forward gain
F6.30 Motor weak magnetic gain Setting range: 0.0-500.0% Factory set: 100.0%
While under AM/PM VC control, if the motor speed is above the rated speed, or the bus voltage is
lower and the running speed is near the rated speed ,the inverter need to control the motor under
the weak magnetic control, so that the motor can track speed setting.
[F6.28] is set to the upper limit of demagnetizing current,and be valid to PM motor.Compared to the
motor rated current, too big weak magnetic current will make the motor demagnetize irreversibly.
Mostly weak magnetic current can guarantee that the motor does not demagnetize irreversibly
within motor rated current ; [F6.29 ~ F6.30] set the weak magnetic control parameters. When there
is instability phenomenon in the weak magnetic process, adjust this parameters group for
debugging.
F6.31 Reserved
F6.32 MTPA gain Setting range：0.0-400.0% Factory default：100.0%
128
F6.33 MTPA filter time Setting range：0.0-100.0ms Factory default：1.0ms
MTPA function is optimizing the PMSM excitation strategies to achieve Max motor output / motor
current; when the permanent magnet motor D, Q-axis inductance difference is large, adjust [F6.32]
can significantly change the motor current under same load; adjust [F6.33] can improve the
stability of the motor running.
F6.34 Reserved
F6.35 Low frequency pull in current Setting range: 0.0～100.0% Factory default: 10.0%
F6.36 High frequency pull in current Setting range: 0.0～100.0% Factory default: 10.0%
F6.37 Frequency of current pulled in Setting range: 0.0～100.0% Factory default: 10.0%
PM open-loop VC control is valid. The current is relative to motor rated current and frequency is
relative to the max output frequency.The pulled in current is mainly used to promote the load ability
in low frequency.The pull- in current frequency [F6.37] as high frequency distinguish threshold, if
low frequency load is larger,the pull-in the current should be promote properly , but too large
current will affect the efficiency of the motor.The actual use should be set up according to the load
situation.
F6.38-F6.69 Reserved
9.8 Torque control parameters

F7.00 Torque/Speed control Setting range：0-1 Factory default：0
0:Speed control
1:Torque control Valid under VC control
Torque given channel Setting range：0-7

F7.01 Factory default：0
selection
Using a relative value for torque setting; 100.0% corresponds to motor rated torque; Setting range
from 0% to 200.0%, indicating that the inverter torque is 2 times the maximum rated torque.
0: Keyboard number given: by the function code [F7.02] given.
1: Keyboard potentiometer setting: set by the keyboard potentiometer analog.
2: VS: set by the VS terminal analog voltage input.
3: AI: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be selected
via the control panel switch.
4: AS : set by AS terminal current analog input.
5: PUL : set by PUL terminal high-speed pulse.
6:RS485 communication given: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication address
0x3005 / 0x2005.
7: Option card
Torque keyboard number Setting range：0-100.0%

F7.02 Factory default：0.0%
setting
When the function code [F7.01] = 0, the torque setting point is given by the function code [F7.02].
F7.03 Torque input lower limit Setting range：0.00-100.00% Factory default：0.00%
129
Lower limit corresponding Setting range ：

F7.04 -200.00-200.00% Factory default：0.00%
setting
Setting range：0.00-100.00% Factory default ：
F7.05 Torque input upper limit
100.00%
Upper limit corresponding Setting range ： Factory default ：
F7.06 -200.00-200.00%
setting 100.00%
F7.07 Given first-order filter time Setting range：0.000-6.000s Factory default：0.100s
The value of torque given channel is linearized by [F7.03~F7.06] to get the torque given value.
Given first-order filter time: Filter the torque given value to make the given torque change
smoothly.
Output torque upper Factory default ：

F7.08 Setting range：0-200.0%
limit 150.0%
Output torque lower
F7.09 Setting range：0-200.0% Factory default：0%
limit
Output torque upper limit： set the upper limit of output torque；
Output torque lower limit： set the lower limit of output torque；
Torque control FWD

F7.10 Setting range：0-7 Factory default：0
speed limit selecting
Used to set the Max FWD operating frequency limit of inverter in torque control mode;
In torque control mode, if the load torque is less than the output torque of the motor, the motor
speed will go up, and in order to prevent emergence such as mechanical systems stall accidents,
the Max motor speed must be limited in torque control mode.

1: Keyboard potentiometer setting×F7.12: set by the keyboard potentiometer analog.
2: VS × F7.12: set by the VS terminal analog voltage input.
3: AI × F7.12: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be
selected via the control panel switch.
4: AS × F7.12: set by AS terminal current analog input.
5: PUL × F7.12: set by PUL terminal high-speed pulse.
6:RS485 communication given×F7.12: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication
address 0x3006 / 0x2006.
7: Option card x F7.12
Note: 100% corresponds to the max output frequency.
Torque control REV

F7.11 Setting range：0-7 Factory default：0
speed limit selecting

1: Keyboard potentiometer setting×F7.13: set by the keyboard potentiometer analog.
2: VS × F7.13: set by the VS terminal analog voltage input.
3: AI × F7.13: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be
4: AS × F7.13: set by AS terminal current analog input.
5: PUL × F7.13: set by PUL terminal high-speed pulse.
6:RS485 communication given×F7.13: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication
address 0x3007 / 0x2007.
7: Option card x F7.13
130
Note: 100% corresponds to the max output frequency.
Torque control FWD

Factory default：
F7.12 Max speed limit Setting range：0.0-100.0%
selecting 100.0%
Torque control REV
Factory default：
F7.13 Max speed limit Setting range：0.0-100.0%
100.0%
selecting
When the function code [F7.10], [F7.11] is set to 0, the Max speed limit would be set by [F7.12],
[F7.13].And protect in case of initial debugging torque function default 100.0% as the seldom
speed setting.
F7.14 Reserved
9.9 V/F control parameters

F8.00 V/F curve selection Setting range:0-11 Factory set: 0
V/F curve selection: used to select the V/F curve types to meet different load requirements.
0: Beeline
1-9: 1.1-1.9 respectively VF power curve, as shown below;
10: VF square curve;
11: custom VF curve; see [F8.01-F8.10];
VF default linear curve for most common situations; multi-idempotent curve and square VF curve
are generally used for VF fans or pumps to reduce the high-frequency current to achieve energy
savings.
Self-setting voltage
V1
Self-setting Factory set:
F8.02 Setting range: 0.00-max frequency
frequency F1 1.00Hz
V2
frequency F2 10.00Hz
131
V3
V4
Self-setting voltage Factory set:
V5 100.0%
Self-setting V/F curve: User sets the 1st/2nd/3rd/4th/5th voltage ratio of V/F curve corresponding to
F1/F2/F3/F4/F5 frequency based on rated output voltage 100%. User sets the 1st/2nd/3rd/4th/5th
frequency of V/F curve corresponding to V1/V2/V3/V4/V5.
Must meet: 0≤F1≤F2≤F3≤F4≤F5≤max frequency, 0≤V1≤V2≤V3≤V4≤V5≤100.0%

V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 is based on motor rated voltage.
Output voltage
percentage
Output voltage adjustment coefficient adjusts output voltage of inverter to meet different V/F
requirement.
F8.12 Torque boost Setting range: 0.0-30.0% Factory set: 0.0%

Torque boost cut-off
frequency
Torque boost:Automatically torque boost while [F8.12] is set 0,and compensate the output
voltage automatically according to the load.Fixed torque boost while [F8.12] is set other values.
Improve low frequency torque trait by voltage compensation. Please set it rightly. If too high, motor
maybe happens over excitation at low frequency running, over heat while long time, even over
current protection or can not start normally.
Note: while [F8.00] is “1 custom v/F curve”, [F8.12] is invalid,and inverter will running with
132
the custom V/F curve,

Torque boost cut-off frequency: Set torque improve valid range. While output frequency is over
this value, torque improving function stops. 100% is corresponding to motor rated frequency.
F8.14 slip compensation gain Setting range:0.0-200.0% Factory set:100.0%

F8.15 Slip compensation limit Setting range:0.0-300.0% Factory set:100.0%
F8.16 Slip compensation filter time Setting range:0.000-6.000s Factory set:0.200s
It makes inverter output frequency self adjust within a setting range according motor load change
to compensate slip frequency to make motor keep constant speed. It effectively relieves the impact
of load change to motor speed.
If it is used with the automatic torque boost function,the low frequency trait can be promoted
obviously.100.0% slip frequency compensation corresponds to the motor rated slip; it may cause
the motor speed exceeds setting value when the compensation value is set too large .Hence,
[F8.15] setting need to be limited.Slip compensation filter time is to filter the slip compensation to
eliminate disturb signal. The longer filter time is, the stronger anti-disturb force is. The shorter filter
time is, the weaker anti-disturb force is. But respond speed will be quicker.
F8.17 Surge suppression gain Setting range: 0.0-900.0% Factory set: 100.0%
While the motor control mode F0.00=0 or 1,it is easily to appear motor current instability and motor
speed oscillation phenomenon in medium and high power occasions , which is a combination of
electrical and mechanical effects of low-frequency resonance. It is possible to suppress the low
frequency resonance by adjusting the [F8.17], but excessive suppression gain may lead to
additional stability problems.
133
F8.18 Reserved
Auto energy saving

control
Energy saving
frequency lower limit
Energy saving voltage
lower limit
F8.22 Setting range: 0～0.200V/MS Factory set:0.010V/MS
regulation rate
F8.23 Setting range：0～0.200V/MS Factory set:0.200V/MS
recovery rate
Auto energy save selection:Under the condition of light load, the motor can adjust the output
voltage automatically after entering the constant speed to promote the efficiency to save energy.
0: OFF
1: ON
Energy saving frequency lower limit: When output frequency is lower than this value, auto
energy save function will exit.
Energy saving voltage lower limit:While automatically saving energy running,the lower limit of
the voltage can reduce.100.0% is corresponding to the current output voltage corresponding to the
output frequency without saving energy.
Energy saving voltage regulation rate: The rate of voltage regulation during the process of
energy saving.
Energy saving voltage recovery rate: The rate of voltage recovery to the normal voltage while
exit the energy saving process.
Note: Enter energy saving only at constant speed running,hence this function is not
suitable to be used in occasions where the given frequency changes frequently.
Output voltage source of

F8.30 Setting range: 0~8 Factory set:0
voltage-frequency separation
While [F0.00]=8,this function code set the output voltage command source;under voltage
-frequency separation mode,the output voltage command 200.0% corresponds to the motor rated
voltage [F5.05] and the output frequency command is set by channel A,B frequency source.Details
refer to [F0.03],[F0.04],[F0.06].
0: Function code F8.31 given
1: Keyboard potentiometer setting: set by the keyboard potentiometer
134

3: AI: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be selected
via the control panel switch.
6: PID output given : set by PID output
7: RS485 communication given: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication
address 0x300A / 0x200A.
8: Option card
Output voltage of
F8.31 voltage-frequency separation Setting range: 0.0~100.0% Factory set:0
number setting
Output voltage of voltage-frequency separation number setting: While [F8.30]=0, it decides
the voltage source given.100.0% corresponds to the motor rated voltage.
Output voltage of voltage Setting Factory set:

F8.32
-frequency separation ACC time range:0.00-100.00s 10.00
Output voltage of voltage Setting Factory set:
F8.33
-frequency separation DEC time range:0.00-100.00s 10.00
Output voltage of voltage -frequency separation ACC time: The time voltage ACC from 0 to
motor rated value.
Output voltage of voltage -frequency separation DEC time: The time voltage DEC from the
rated value to 0.
Voltage-frequency separation
stop model
O u tp u t V o lta g e
M o to r ra te d v o lta g e
T a rg e t V o lta g e
t
R e a l A C C tim e R e a l D E C tim e
S e t A C C tim e S e t D E C tim e
V o ly a g e -F re q u e n c y s e p e ra tio n d ia g rm
This function code set the stop mode of voltage-frequency separation .

0: Output voltage and frequency ACC/DEC no interaction
1: Output voltage down to 0V, then output frequency start to decrease
Note:
135
1. While [F8.34]=0,frequency and voltage DEC at the same time,but stop according to the
frequency set time.
2. While FWD/REV switching,the output voltage DEC to 0 firstly and then the output frequency
DEC to 0 and change the direction.
9.10 Malfunction and protection parameters

FA.00 OC suppression function Setting range：0~1 Factory default：0
Factory default ：
FA.01 OC suppression point Setting range：0.0-300.0%
160.0%
Factory default ：
FA.02 OC suppression gain Setting range：0.0-500.0%
100.0%
OC suppression function:The OC suppression function can monitor the real-time load current,
and automatically limit it below the set of OC suppression point, to prevent the fault trip caused by
excessive current.To some large inertia or sharp changing load, the function is especially valid..
0: Suppression valid
1: ACC/DEC valid, constant speed invalid
OC suppression point: Set current limit level(By stopping ACC/DEC or decreasing/ increasing
output frequency to control the output current).
OC suppression gain: Adjust the response speed of OC suppression.
Note: Using this function might prolong ACC/DEC time.During the process of inverter start/ stop , if
in the case of high current,the output frequency will not ACC/DEC to the given frequency as
expected d,which shows that the limiting function,.At that time, please reduce the load or adjust
relevant parameters.
Current hardware protection

FA.03 Setting range: 0000-0221 Factory set: 0001
settings
LED “0”digit: cycle-by-cycle current limit: cycle-by-cycle current limit can limit current rise to a
certain extent by hardware protection so that the current does not exceed the protection value of
the inverter and avoid skipping flow fault shutdown.
0: Close
1: Open
LED “00” digit: OC protection disturbing suppression While this function is valid, invert will
judge the E. OC alarm intelligently to eliminate the disturbance, and only make the alarm to the real
fault signal. This function may delay the alarm time, and please use it cautiously.
0: Off
1: First grade disturbing suppression
2: Second grade disturbing suppression
136
LED “000” digit: SC protection First grade disturbing suppression While this function is valid,
invert will judge the E. SC alarm intelligently to eliminate the disturbance, and only make the alarm
to the real fault signal. This function may delay the alarm time, and please use it cautiously.
0: Off
1: First grade disturbing suppression
2: Second grade disturbing suppression
FA.04 Reserved
Bus over voltage hardware

protection
Protect the rise of the bus voltage by hardware,which is a kind of backup and supplement to the
software protection to improve the reliability of the equipment.
0: OFF
1: ON
Bus over voltage
suppression protection
LED “0” digit: Over voltage suppression control

0: Prohibited
1: Valid in DEC
2: Valid both in ACC/DEC
Select whether DEC OV suppression is valid :If this function is valid,when bus voltage reaches
or exceeds [FA.07] when inverter DEC running, the inverter will slow down or stop DEC, thus
ensuring there’s no OV protection due to high bus voltage.
Select whether ACC OV suppression is valid :If this function is valid,when bus voltage reaches
or exceeds [FA.07] when inverter ACC running, the inverter will automatically adjust the operating
frequency and suppress the bus voltage from increasing, thus ensuring there’s no OV protection
due to high bus voltage. This function is special valid to eccentric load.
LED “00” digit: Overexcitation control

0: Off
1: On
Bus over voltage Factory default ：

FA.07 Setting range：110.0-150.0%
suppression point 128.0%
137
Bus over voltage Factory default ：

suppression gain 100.0%
When bus voltage reaches or exceeds [FA.07] when inverter running, the inverter will
automatically adjust the operating frequency and suppress the bus voltage from increasing, thus
ensuring there’s no OV protection due to high bus voltage. Adjusting [FA.08] can promote OV
suppression effect; set [FA.08] = 0: cut-off OV suppression function and OV suppression is valid
for any motor control mode.
Bus under voltage

FA.09 Setting range：0~1 Factory default：0
suppression function
Bus under voltage
FA.10 Setting range：60.0-90.0% Factory default：80.0%
suppression point
Bus under voltage Factory default ：
suppression gain 100.0%
When bus voltage reaches or lower than [FA.10] when inverter running, the inverter will
automatically adjust the operating frequency and suppress the bus voltage from decreasing, thus
ensuring there’s no LV protection due to low bus voltage. Adjusting [FA.11] can promote LV
suppression effect; set [FA.09] = 0: cut-off LV suppression function and LV suppression is valid
for any motor control mode.
Bus under-voltage Factory default ：

FA.12 Setting range:60.0-90.0%
protection point 60.0%
Bus under-voltage protection point:This parameter specifies the lower voltage allowed by bus
voltage during operation, for some low power occasions, appropriate under-voltage protection level
can be reduced to ensure the normal working of the inverter.
Note: When the grid voltage is too low, the motor output torque will decrease. For constant
power load and constant torque load, low grid voltage will increase the frequency converter
input and output current, thereby reducing the reliability of the inverter operation.
FA.13 Reserved
138
FA.14 Power-to-ground short-circuit detection Setting range: 0-1 Factory default：0
Power-to-ground short-circuit detection detects the motor insulation when power on. If the motor
insulation damage is shorted to ground, the inverter will detect and report a short to ground fault.
0: Close
1: Open
Note: Operate this function while electrify,there is voltage output in UVW terminal.Pay attention to
your safety.
FA.15 Phase loss protection Setting range: 0000-0021 Factory default：0011
LED “0” digit: output phase protection: Motor drive connected occurrence will be reported
missing output phase fault E.OLF.
0: Close
1: Open
LED “00” digit: input phase protection: Occurrence of a grid phase inverter will report missing
input phase failure E.ILF.
0: Off
1: Open the alarm
2: Open the fault
FA.1 Motor overload protection Factory default ：

Setting range：0.0-250.0%
6 curve coefficient 100.0%
Long term motor overload would produce serious heat, [FA.16] sets the coefficient of load motor
overload protection or thermal protection; the motor overload protection and motor current curve
was inverse, protection curve when FA.16 = 100.0% is shown as follows:
Protection tim e
60m in
2m in
120% 185% C urrent
The current entering protection curve= (the real motor current / oL protection coefficient)x110%
139
So increasing [FA.16] can improve motor overload; overload pre alarm coefficient can be set by
[FA.16], when the motor had reached the degree of overload factor [FA.16] setting, the inverter
outputs alarm by terminal, for details please see Y terminal function.
Note:When a inverter parallel with several motors in operation, th the thermal relay
protection function will have no use, in order to effectively protect the motor, please
install the thermal protection relay at the end of each motor.
Load pre alarm detection

FA.17 Setting range： 0000~1414 Factory default：0000
setting
LED “0” digit: Detection selection (protection 1)
0: Not detected
1: Detected load is too large
2: Detected load is too large only at constant speed
3: Insufficient load detected
4: Insufficient load only at constant speed
LED “00” digit: Alarm selection
1: Fault protection and free stop
LED “000” digit: Detection selection (protection 2)
0: Not detected
2: Detected load is too large only at constant speed
4: Insufficient load only at constant speed
FA.18 Setting range： 0.0~200.0% Factory default：130.0%
level 1
FA.19 Setting range： 0.0~60.0s Factory default：5.0s
time 1
FA.20 Setting range： 0.0~200.0% Factory default：30.0%
level 2
FA.21 Setting range： 0.0~60.0s Factory default：5.0s
time 2
Under VF control mode ,the output current of the motor will be used as the load pre alarm
judgment value, and100% corresponds to the motor rated current; under VC control mode, output
torque of the motor is used as load pre alarm judgment value, and 100% corresponds motor rated
output torque.The load pre alarm judgment value in the detection time [FA.19/ FA.21] is compared
with the detection threshold [FA.17] [FA.18/FA.20],and make corresponding action according to
140
[FA.17]to make pre alarm through the terminal output.Details refer to Y terminal function.
FA.22 Reserved
Protection action when Factory default:

FA.23 Setting range: 0000-0012
speed slip is too large 0000
LED “0” digit: Detection selection

0: Not detected
1: Detected at constant speed
2: Detecting
0: Free stop and report fault
detection threshold when

FA.24 Setting range: 0.0-60.0% Factory default: 10.0%
speed slip is too large
detection time when speed slip
FA.25 Setting range:0.0-60.0s Factory default: 2.0s
is too large
Under VC control,if the speed feedback value and speed setting bias are more than detection
threshold [FA.24] during the detection time [FA.25], inverter judges that the detection bias is too
large and operate according to [FA.23].Speed bias detection threshold 100% corresponds to max
frequency..
Factory default:
FA.26 Rapid protection action Setting range: 0000-0012
0000
LED “0” digit: Detection selection

0: Not detected
2: Detecting
FA.27 Rapid detection threshold Setting range: 0.0～150.0% Factory default: 110.0%
Setting range:0.000～
FA.28 Rapid detection time Factory default: 0.010s
2.000s
141
Under VC control,if the speed feedback value is more than detection threshold [FA.27] during the
detection time [FA.28], inverter judges that the speed abnormal and operate according to
[FA.26].Speed bias detection threshold 100% corresponds to max frequency..
FA.29~FA.36 Reserved
Malfunction auto-reset
FA.37 Setting range: 0-5 Factory default: 0
times
Malfunction auto-reset Factory
FA.38 Setting range: 0.1-100.0s
interval default:1.0s
Malfunction auto-reset times:

0: Off No automatic reset function; manual reset.
1-5: On 1-5 is the automatic reset times;
The inverter would fail or stop during operation due to load fluctuations, voltage fluctuations and
other factors. At this time in order to ensure continuity of system operation, automatic resets of
inverter for overload, over current, system abnormalities, over voltage, under voltage faults are
allowed. The inverter would restart by speed tracking in the process of self recovery. If the inverter
can’t restart within the set times, stop output for fault protection; Fault recovery times can be set up
to five times, after 10 minutes running the fault recovery times would be re-recorded and the times
before is automatically cleared. Consecutive failures of restarting might cause harm, so the
proposed fault recovery time is 1;
Output terminal can be selected to act or not act in automatic reset process. Details refer to
[F2.45-F2.47].
Malfunction auto-reset interval: It defines waiting time before resetting after fault.
Note: 1.Only valid for fault of OL, OC, system abnormal, under voltage. Not valid for other
faults.
2. Can’t reset before dealing with malfunction.
Attention: Please use this function carefully in occasions that can’t start with load, or that
needs alarm immediately when there’s no output.
FA.39 Fault diagnose information See fault code list --

FA.40 Fault type See fault code list --
FA.41 Fault running frequency 0.00-max frequency --
FA.42 Fault output voltage 0-1500V --
FA.43 Fault output current 0.1-2000.0A --
FA.44 Fault bus voltage 0-3000V --
FA.45 Fault module temperature 0-100℃ --
LED “0”digit: run direction
0: FWD
FA.46 Fault inverter status --
1: REV
LED“00”digit: run status
142
0: stop
1: steady speed
2: ACC
3: DEC
LED“000”digit: Reserved
LED“0000”digit: Reserved
FA.47 Fault input terminal status See input terminal chart --
FA.48 Fault output terminal status See output terminal chart --
FA.49 The last malfunction types See fault code list --
The last malfunction running
FA.50 0.00-max frequency --
frequency
The last malfunction output
FA.51 0-1500V --
voltage
FA.52 0.1-2000.0A --
current
FA.53 The last malfunction bus voltage 0-3000V --
The last malfunction module
FA.54 0-100℃ --
temperature
LED “0” digit: Running direction
0: FWD
1: REV
LED “00” digit: Running status
0: Stop
FA.55 The last machine state
1: Constant speed
2: ACC
3: DEC
The last malfunction input
FA.56 See input terminal chart --
terminal state
FA.57 See output terminal chart --
terminal state
FA.58 The first two malfunction types See fault code list --
FA.59 The first three malfunction types See fault code list --
Note: Malfunction records can be cleared by [F0.19]. See [F0.19] details.
9.11 PID parameters

PID control is used for process control mode normal. For the aim of that the object which be
controlled is stabilized as the PID given, it adjusts inverter output frequency to form passive
feedback PID adjustment by series of proportional, integral, differential calculation by difference
between the feedback of that be controlled and the inverter PID given.
143
Fb.00 PID give signal source Setting range: 0-8 Factory set: 0
Use to set the input channel of PID controller given signal.

0: Keyboard number given PID Decided by [Fb.01] setting.
3: AI: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be
6: RS485 communication given: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication address
0x3008 / 0x2008.
7: Option card: set by option card. Details refer to option card specification.
8: Terminal selection PID giving is selected by multifunction input terminal combine which is set
by [F2.00-F2.06].
Terminal switch table:
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 PID giving terminal switch selection
OFF OFF OFF Keyboard number give PID
OFF OFF ON Keyboard potentiometer
OFF ON OFF Terminal VS voltage analog
OFF ON ON Terminal AI analog
ON OFF OFF Terminal AS current analog
ON OFF ON Terminal PUL pulse signal
ON ON OFF RS485 communication
ON ON ON Optional card
Any doubt please see "FC" parameter group which is about multispeed time sequence.
Keyboard number PID Factory set:

Fb.01 Setting range: 0.00-100.0%
given/feedback 50.0%
This function is valid only when [Fb.00]/[Fb.03] is set as keyboard number given/feedback. After
this parameter is changed, PID given in monitor object is modified automatically at the same time.
If [Fb.09] LED “0” is set as 2, this value can be modified by UP/DW key. Whether save the
modification is decided by [F4.09] LED “00” digit.
Fb.02 PID given changing time Setting range:0.00-60.00 Factory set:1.00s
PID given changing time: the ratio of PID given changing time from 0.0% to 100.0% .While PID
given changes,PID given changes in linear line by the given time to reduce the bad influence of
given surge.
144
PID feedback signal

Fb.03 Setting range:0-9 Factory set:2
source
Use to set the input channel of PID controller given signal.

0: Keyboard number given PID Decided by [Fb.01] setting.
3: AI: set by the AI terminal analog voltage or current input, voltage or current input can be
6: RS485 communication given: set by the RS485 serial communication; communication address
0x3009 / 0x2009.
7: Option card: set by option card. Details refer to option card specification.
8: Terminal selection PID giving is selected by multifunction input terminal combine which is set
by [F2.00-F2.06].
Terminal switch table:

Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 PID giving terminal switch selection
OFF OFF OFF Keyboard number give PID
OFF OFF ON Keyboard potentiometer
OFF ON OFF Terminal VS voltage analog
OFF ON ON Terminal AI analog
ON OFF OFF Terminal AS current analog
ON OFF ON Terminal PUL pulse signal
ON ON OFF RS485 communication
ON ON ON Optional card
Any doubt please see "FC" parameter group which is about multispeed time sequence.
Fb.04 Feedback signal filter time Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.010s
Fb.05 Feedback signal gain Setting range: 0.00-10.00 Factory set: 1.00
Fb.06 Given and feedback range Setting range: 0-100.0 Factory set: 100.0
Feedback signal filter time: Filter the feedback signal to eliminate to the disturb. The longer filter
time is,the stronger anti-disturb force is,but the slower feedback response is.
Feedback signal gain: It is used to linearize the feedback input signal.
Given and feedback range: PID given and feedback don’t have the unit to adjust the PID given
(C-08) and PID feedback display(C-09).PID given and feedback 100.0% corresponds with the
given and feedback range[Fb.06].For example,[Fb.06]is set 80.0,if the PID given 50.0%, and then
PID given display C-08 is 40.0.
Fb.07 PID control selection Setting range: 0000-1111 Factory set: 0000
LED “0” digit: feedback trait selection

0: Positive trait. It is suitable for occasions where PID feedback is bigger than PID given and
requires reduce output frequency PID to balance PID. Such as constant pressure water supply, gas
supply, take-up tension control.
145
1: Negative trait. It is suitable for occasions where PID feedback is bigger than PID given and
requires raise output frequency PID to balance PID. Such as constant temperature control, pay-off
tension control.
LED “0000” digit: Differential adjustment properties
0 : Differential of deviation
1 : Differential of feedback
Fb.08 PID preset output Setting range: 0.00-100.0% Factory set: 100.0%
PID preset output
Fb.09 Setting range: 0.0-6500.0s Factory set: 0.0s
running time
While it defines as PID start running, frequency ACC to PID pre-set output [Fb.08] according to
ACC time 1. After setting [Fb.09] time, it runs as PID closed loop trait.
Note:When PID is used for frequency source given, [F0.03 = 8] preset outputs 100.0%
corresponding maximum output frequency; when PID is used for the frequency voltage
separation and outputs voltage source; [F8.30 = 5] preset outputs 100.0% corresponding
motor rated voltage.
PID control deviation Factory default:

limit 0.0%
The max deviation allowed by PID feedback to PID given. When feedback is in this range, PID
adjustment stops. Output does not change; the reasonable use of the feature helps coordinate the
contradiction between system output accuracy and stability.
Fb.11 Proportion gain: P1 Setting range: 0.000-9.999 Factory set: 0.100

Fb.12 Integral time: I1 Setting range: 0.0-600.0s Factory set: 1.0s
146
Fb.13 Differential coefficient : D1 Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.000s

Fb.14 Proportion gain: P2 Setting range: 0.000-9.999 Factory set: 0.100
Fb.15 Integral time: I2 Setting range: 0.0-600.0s Factory set: 1.0s
Fb.16 Differential coefficient : D2 Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.000s
The parameter value controlled by PID should be set according to the actual characteristics of the
system.PID parameters group 1 (Fb.11~Fb.13) and PID parameters group 2(Fb.14~Fb.16) ,are
selected by the switch conditions [Fb.17] set.
Proportion gain P: It decides the impact of P act to bias. Response is quicker while gain is bigger.
But there will be surge while it is too big.
Integral time I: It decides the size of effect of I act. The impact is stronger while the I is bigger.
Differential coefficient D: Decide the impact of change rate of PIN controller to bias or feedback
signal. According to the change trend to adjust to suppression the change of feedback signal.
PID parameter
Fb.17 Setting range: 0~2 Factory set:0
switching condition
Low value of
Fb.18 Setting range: 0.0-100.0% Factory set: 20.0%
switching deviation
High value of
switching deviation
In some occasions, just one group of PID adjusting parameters can ont meet the requirement of
the process ,hence different PID parameters group need to be adopted in different occasions.
PID parameter switching condition
0: Not switch PID parameters select the group 1 (Fb.11~Fb.13)
1: Use DI terminal to switch Multi function terminal selection is set 23 (PID parameters
switch).While this terminal is invalid, select PID group 1 (Fb.11~Fb.13);while this terminal is
valid,select group 2(Fb.14~Fb.16).
2: Switch according to deviation While the deviation absolute value of PID given and
feedback is less than [Fb.18], select group 1;while the deviation absolute value of PID given and
feedback is more than [Fb.19], select group 2;while the deviation absolute value of PID given and
feedback is between [Fb.18] and [Fb.19], select the linear interpolation value of the 2 groups,which
is as follows;
147
Fb.20 Reserved
Fb.21 Differential limit Setting range: 0.0-100.0% Factory set: 5.0%
[Fb.21] differential limit is used to set PID differential output range.In PID controller,the differential
effect is sensitive ,and easy to make the system oscillation. Usually,limit the PID differential range
within a small scale.
Fb.22 PID output upper limit Setting range: 0.0-100.0% Factory set: 100.0%
Fb.23 PID output lower limit Setting range: -100.0-Fb.19 Factory set: 0.0%
Fb.24 PID output filter time Setting range: 0.000-6.000s Factory set: 0.0s
[Fb.22 ]sets the PID output upper limit;[Fb.23] sets the PID output lower limit.
[Fb.24]PID output filter time used to filter the PID output.It will weak the surge caused by PID
output result, and decrease the closed-loop system response performance.
Detection time while

Fb.25 Setting range: 0.0-120.0s Factory set: 1.0s
feedback wire break
Act selections while
Fb.26 Setting range: 0-3 Factory set: 0
feedback wire break
Wire break alarm Factory set:
upper limit 100.0%
Wire break alarm
lowest limit
While PID given frequency and inverter is running, if feedback signal which is bigger the [Fb.27] or
smaller than [Fb.28] is detected out and keeps for [Fb.25] delay time, it is considered as sensor
wire break.
Feedback wire-break action selections
0: Go on PID operation without alarm: no wire-break detection when invalid
1: Stop and alarm malfunction: When the inverter detects a sensor break, immediately block
output, motor free stop and report E.PID fault.
2: Go on PID operation and output alarm signal: When the inverter detects a sensor break, still
run by the PID regulation, but the keyboard displays E.PID fault and flashes.
3: Run the current frequency and output alarm signal: When the inverter detects a sensor
break, maintain constant output frequency before the fault, but the keyboard displays E.PID fault
and flashes.
148
Wire break alarm upper limit: Set the upper limit of PID sensor wire break detection.When
feedback signal is over alarm upper limit for time [Fb.25], it is considered as sensor wire break.
Wire break alarm lower limit: Set the lower limit of PID sensor wire break detection.When
feedback signal is under alarm upper limit for time [Fb.25], it is considered as sensor wire break.
Fb.29 PID suspend detection threshold Setting range: 0.0-100.0% Factory set: 0.0%
Fb.30 PID suspend detection time Setting range: 0.0-600.0s Factory set: 1.0s
While PID output is less than [Fb.29] and hold time up to [Fb.30],PID enters into pause state;is the
output is more than this value and hold time up to Fb.30,PID exit the pause state.No suspend
detection if this value is 0.
Fb.31 Reserved
9.12 Multistep, PLC function and swing frequency parameters

FC.00 Step 1 Setting range: 0.00-max frequency Factory set: 10.00Hz
FC.01 Step 2 Setting range: 0.00-max frequency Factory set: 20.00 Hz
It sets run frequency of 15 steps in PLC and multistep control.

Mult steps control has priorty only after JOG. While multi steps control, 4 multifunction input
terminals are needed to set as control terminals. Set details refer to [F2.00-F2.06].
Inverter is running at which step is decides by the ON/OFF state of 4 control terminal and COM.
Run and direction is controlled by run signal and direction gived by [F0.02]. ACC/DEC time default
is ACC/DEC time 1 [F0.14], [F0.15]. Or select ACC/DEC time by ACC/DEC time selection terminal
set by [F2.00-F2.06].
Multi steps Multi steps Multi steps Multi steps terminal
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 speed
OFF OFF OFF ON 1X［FC.00］
OFF OFF ON OFF 2X［FC.01］
OFF OFF ON ON 3X［FC.02］
OFF ON OFF OFF 4X［FC.03］
149
OFF ON OFF ON 5X［FC.04］

OFF ON ON OFF 6X［FC.05］
OFF ON ON ON 7X［FC.06］
ON OFF OFF OFF 8X［FC.07］
ON OFF OFF ON 9X［FC.08］
ON OFF ON OFF 10X［FC.09］
ON OFF ON ON 11X［FC.10］
ON ON OFF OFF 12X［FC.11］
ON ON OFF ON 13X［FC.12］
ON ON ON OFF 14X［FC.13］
ON ON ON ON 15X［FC.14］
K1
inverter
X1 FWD/STOP
K2
X2 REV/STOP
K3
X3 Multistep terminal 1
K4
K5
K6
COM common terminal
Terminal connection
frequency 6X
5X 7X
4X
3X 8X
2X 9X
1X
10X
tim e
11X
12X
13X
14X
15X
ON
m ultisteps term inal4(X6)
ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON
REV(X3)
ON
FW D(X3)
M ULTISTEP TIM E O RDER
150
PLC run mode

FC.15 Setting range: 0000-2212 Factory set: 0000
selections
Select PLC running mode while program given.

LED “0” digit: cycle mode
0: Stop after single cycle While receiving order, inverter run from the first step, time unit is set by
[FC.15] LED “00” digit. Running time is set by [FC.16-FC.30]. Running direction and ACC/DEC
time is selected by [FC.31-FC.45]. Turn to next step while run time is over, run time, direction,
ACC/DEC time of every step can be set separately. Inverter output 0 Hz while finished 15 steps
running. If one step running time is 0, it will skip this step.
1: Continuous cycles Inverter not stop and runs at the latest speed while finished 15 steps
running. Time unit is set by [FC.15] LED “00” digit. Run time is set by [FC.16-FC.30]. Run direction
and ACC/DEC time is selected by [FC.31-FC.45].
2: Keep final value after single cycle Inverter back to 1st step while finished 15 steps running.
Time unit is set by[FC.15] LED “00” digit. Run time is set by [FC.16-FC.30]. Run direction and
ACC/DEC time is selected by [FC.31-FC.45].
Note: PLC ACC/DEC time is set by [FC.31-FC.45] LED “00”, and not be affected by terminal
selection.
LED“00”digit: Time unit

0: second
1: minute
2: hour
LED“000”digit: Power down save mode
0: no save
1: save
151
This parameter is defined as when the selection process is running, the inverter power whether to
store the current state of the running program (running stages, the remaining time of this stage,
deceleration and running direction , etc.). If you choose power down storage, the “000”digit of
[FC.15] defines the way power is restored of the next running. To ensure sustainable state of
inverter after power recovery, the parameter should be set as "1".
LED“0000”digit: Start-up mode
0: Restart from the 1st step
1: Restart from the step where stop
2: Restart from the time when stop
Set restart mode while stop for some reasons (stop, fault, power off and so on).
Choosing 0: Restart from the 1st step
Choosing 1: Restart from the step when stop
Choosing 2: Continue from the time when stop
Note:Output frequency is limited by upper/lowest limitation. While frequency is lower then
lowest limitation, it runs as [F0.13] lowest limitation mode.
FC.16 PLC 1st step running time Setting range: 0.0-6500.0(s/m/h) Factory set: 10.0
FC.17 PLC 2nd step running time Setting range: 0.0-6500.0(s/m/h) Factory set: 10.0
FC.18 PLC 3rd step running time Setting range: 0.0-6500.0(s/m/h) Factory set: 10.0
FC.19 PLC 4th step running time Setting range: 0.0-6500.0(s/m/h) Factory set: 10.0
Set running time of every 15 steps. Time unit is decided by [FC.15] LED “00” digit setting.
FC.31 PLC 1st step direction and ADD/DEC time Factory set: 0000
FC.32 PLC 2nd step direction and ADD/DEC time Factory set: 0000
FC.33 PLC 3rd step direction and ADD/DEC time Factory set: 0000
FC.34 PLC 4th step direction and ADD/DEC time Factory set: 0000
FC.36 PLC 6th step direction and ADD/DEC time Setting range: Factory set: 0000
FC.37 PLC 7th step direction and ADD/DEC time 0000-0031 Factory set: 0000
152
Set running direction and ACC/DEC time of every 15 step while program running.
LED “0” digit: this step run direction
0: FWD
1: REV
If [F0.16] LED “00” digit is 1 only the FWD command is allowed , and if setting is REV, inverter runs
as 0.00Hz.
LED “00” digit: ACC/DEC time in this step
0: ACC/DEC time 1
1: ACC/DEC time 2
2: ACC/DEC time 3
4: ACC/DEC time 4
FC.46-FC.48 Reserved
FC.49 Swing frequency control Setting range：0-1 Factory default：0

FC.50 Swing amplitude control Setting range：0-1 Factory default：0
FC.51 Reserved
FC.52 Swing frequency amplitude Setting range：0.0-100.0% Factory default：10.0%
FC.53 Jump frequency amplitude Setting range：0.0-50.0% Factory default：10.0%
FC.54 Swing frequency rising time Setting range：0.00-650.00s Factory default：5.00s
FC.55 Swing frequency falling time Setting range：0.00-650.00s Factory default：5.00s
The inverter changes output frequency periodically with a predetermined ACC/DEC time when
swing frequency runs. This feature is especially useful in the textile industry system in which the
speed changes according to the diameter of bobbin.
Swing center frequency comes from given frequency of main and auxiliary channel or the set
frequency in multi-speed or PLC running; swing frequency would be automatically canceled in jog
and closed-loop running. When PLC and swing frequency run simultaneously, switching between
the PLC segment and swing frequency would fail; swing frequency begins after transiting from PLC
deceleration phase to PLC set frequency; press PLC stage ACC/DEC time to decelerate when
stop.
While using the swing frequency([FC.49] is valid),inverter ACC to swing center frequency
according to ACC/DEC time, and then cycle run according to the swing frequency amplitude
[FC.52], startup frequency [FC.53], swing frequency rising time [FC.54] and swing frequency
falling time [FC.55] until the stop command by deceleration time.
swing frequency control This parameter defines whether use the swing frequency function
0: invalid
1: valid
153
swing amplitude control

0: Relative to center frequency: variable,swing amplitude AW changes with the center frequency,
the rate of change, see [FC.52] definition.
1: Relative to max frequency:fixed, Amplitude AW is determined by the maximum frequency and
[FC.52]
Swing frequency amplitude: This parameter defines the frequency amplitude when in swing
frequency control.
Variable Swing: AW = center frequency × [FC.52]
Fixed Swing: AW = maximum operating frequency [F0.09] × [FC.52]
Jump swing frequency amplitude: used to set the jump frequency while set the swing frequency
running.
Start up frequency= Swing frequency amplitude AW x [FC.53]
Swing frequency rising time: used to set the ACC time of swing frequency.
Swing frequency falling time: used to set the DEC time of swing frequency.
Output frequency
jump frequency amplitude
swing frequency
upper limit swing amplitude
swing frequency
central limit
swing frequenc
lower limit
DEC
ACC
time
0
FC.56 Reserved
9.13 Communication control function parameters

Fd.00 Main-slave machine Setting range: 0000-011 Factory set: 0000
Choose inverter as main machine or slave machine when Modbus communication or CAN
communication. Details for Modbus, refer to Appendix 2:Modbus communication protocol.
LED “0” digit: Modbus Communication Main and Slave Selection

0: Slave machine Inverter is slave machine. Communication address is decided by [Fd.01].
Inverter receives order from main machine and decides whether to reply or not when writing
operation according to [Fd.08] setting. Reply delay time is set by [Fd.05].
1: Main machine Inverter, as main machine, sends data to communication network by broadcast
orders. All slave machines accept orders from main machine. The data sending of main machine is
set by [Fd.09].
154

Note:
1. when inverter is regarded as the main machine setting an network, all slave machines
can only be connected to the network when using inverters of VEICHI; The main machine
sends broadcast data by self-defined free protocol.
2. While connecting to CANopen expansion card communication,the parameters need to be
set as follows:
[Fd.00] LED”0” digit =0: slave machine;
[Fd.01] Address set by selection sliding switch in expansion card;
[Fd.02] LED”0” digit=4: band rate 19200bps
[Fd.03] 0: Data format(N,8,1) no checkout,Data digit: 8, Stop digit: 1
Fd.01 485 communication address Setting range: 1-247 Factory set: 1
It set communication address while inverter is Modbus communication slave machine. If inverter is
main machine, this parameter is no meaning. 0 is broadcast address.
Communication baud
Fd.02 Setting range: 0000-0065 Factory set: 0003
rate selections
LED “0” digit: Modbus communication baud rate: set the communication baud rate
0：1200 bps
1：2400 bps
2：4800 bps
3：9600 bps
4：19200 bps
5：38400 bps
LED “00” digit:Reserved
Fd.03 Modbus data format Setting range: 0-5 Factory set: 0
0: (N, 8, 1) no checkout, Data digit: 8, Stop digit: 1

1: (E, 8, 1) even checkout, Data digit: 8, Stop digit: 1
2: (O, 8, 1) odd checkout, Data digit: 8, Stop digit: 1
3:(N,8,2) no checkout,Data digit:8, Stop digit:2
4:(E,8,2) even checkout,Data digit:8, Stop digit:2
5:(O,8,2) odd checkout,Data digit:8, Stop digit:2
Fd.04 Communication ratio setting Setting range: 0.00-5.00 Factory set: 1.00
155
The data in communication address 0x2000 or 0x3000of upper machine multiply this parameter is
communication giving of this machine. Upper machine communication order can be modified pro
rate.
Modbus communication
Fd.05 Setting range: 0.1-100.0s Factory set: 1.0s
answer delay
It defines the intermediate interval between sending data to the upper machine after the data is
accepted. While inverter is Modbus communication slave machine,While delay time is shorter than
system dealing time, real delay time is same as system dealing time. While delay time is longer
than system dealing time, it has to delay while system dealing finished. It does not send data to
upper machine until delay time arrive.
Modbus communication
Fd.06 Setting range: 0.1-100.0s Factory set: 1.0s
overtime fault time
Modbus communication fault
Fd.07 Setting range: 0-3 Factory set: 1
act mode selections
Modbus communication overtime fault time: If the interval between one communication and
next communication is over communication overtime, it is considered as communication break fault.
[Fd.07] decides the act mode.
Modbus communication fault act mode selections

0: No checkout overtime fault No fault checkout.Inverter runs according the last communication
command.
1:Alarm and stop freely If it has not received next frame order or the communication order while
the latest communication giving order is over [Fd.06] time setting, inverter alarms fault E.CE and
stops.
2: Alarm, go on running While inverter running command is given by communication,if it has not
received the new communication order while the latest communication giving order is over [Fd.06]
time setting, inverter alarms A.074 and runs according the last order.
3: Forced stop Frequency inverter stop while communication giving order is over than[Fd.06]
setting time and does not receive next frame order or other communication order.
Fd.08 Modbus transmission response Setting range:0-1 Factory set: 0
The parameter chooses whether to respond when the upper machine sends a write command to
the drive. If the upper computer needs the reply from the drive, the drive will occupy sharing
communication bus; when doing communications control, the upper computer need to retain
enough time to reply. If the upper computer does not need a reply message but only send
commands to the drive, you can choose no respond to write operation to improve the utilization
efficiency of the communication bus. This parameter is valid only for write operation, invalid for
read operation.
0: write operation with response
1: write operation without response
156
Modbus main
Fd.09 machine sending Setting range: 0000-BBBB Factory set: 0031
selections
Set the data that inverter sent the slave machines when inverter is main machine.All slaves will
receive the command from the host when the main machine sends broadcast commands.
The host can send four polling data, corresponding to the settings of LED “0” digit, “00” digit,“000”
digit and “0000” digit. No data is transmitted when invalid.
LED “0” digit: 1st group of frame selection
0: Invalid
1: Main machine run command
2: Main machine given frequency
3: Main machine output frequency
4: Main machine upper limit frequency
5: Main machine given torque
6: Main machine output torque
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
9: Main machine given PID
A: Main machine feedback PID
B: Reserved
LED “00” digit: 2nd group of frame selection as above
LED “000” digit: 3rd group of frame selection as above
LED “0000” digit: 4th group of frame selection as above
Host broadcast data Corresponding address and application accepted by Slaver

1: running command given 0x3001, Can be used as the data of running command given
source
0x01:FWD run
0x02:REV run
0x03:FWD jog
0x04:REV jog
0x05:Stop command (Slave machine stops according stop
mode)
2: Main machine given 0x3000,can be used as communication given frequency
frequency
3: Main machine output 0x3000,can be used as communication given frequency
frequency
4: Main machine upper limit 0x3004,can be used as communication given frequency upper
frequency limit
5: Main machine given torque 0x3005,can be used as communication given torque
6: Main machine output torque 0x3005,can be used as communication given torque
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
9: Main machine given PID 0x3008,can be used as PID communication given
A: Main machine feedback 0x3009,can be used as PID communication given
PID
157
RS485 communication port

Fd.10 Setting range：0-2 Factory default: 0
configuration
RS485 communication port configuration

0：Modbus communication: general Modbus method
1：Serial port monitoring: monitoring inverter running state by upper machine.
2：Reserved
Fd.11- Fd.13 Reserved
Fd.14 LAN 1st level address Setting range: 0～9999 Factory default: 0
Fd.15 LAN 2nd level address Setting range: 0～9999 Factory default: 0
[Fd.14],[Fd.15] is the address set by 433 wireless communication module.Details refer to 433
wireless communication module manual.
9.14 Inverter Fault Code List

Communicatio Fault
Fault Fault diagnose（FA.39）
n code display
0 -- No fault
1. Falling edge trigger

1 E. SC Module fault
2. SC low level
1.Falling edge trigger OC
4 E.oC1 Over-current when ACC 2.OC low level
3.SD lock
5 E.oC2 Over-current when DEC 2.OC low level
3.SD lock
2.OC low level
Over-current in stable 3.SD lock
6 E.oC3
speed 11.Falling edge trigger OC (Stop)
12.OC low level (Stop)
13.SD lock (Stop)
1.Hardware over-voltage
7 E.oU1 Over-voltage when ACC
2.Software over-voltage
1.Hardware over-voltage
8 E.oU2 Over-voltage when DEC
2.Software over-voltage
Over-voltage in stable 1.Hardware over-voltage
9 E.oU3
speed 2.Software over-voltage
10 E.LU2 Under voltage in bus Bus under voltage at running
11 E.oL1 Motor Overload
158
0: Caused by output current

12 E.oL2 Inverter Overload accumulation
3: Caused by CBC signal holding
13 E.ILF Input phase loss
14 E.oLF Output phase loss
15 E.oH2 Rectifier over-heat
16 E.oH1 Inverter over-heat
17 E. EF External fault
18 E. CE Communication fault
1:Zero drift of U phase is too large

2:Zero drift of V phase is too large
4:Zero drift of W phase is too
19 E.HAL Current detection fault large(three haul is valid)
100:Sum of 3phase is not equal
0(three haul is valid)
FU.27: Number of haul is wrong
1:Current over limit

2: Current zero drift is abnormal
3:Motor impedance unbalance
4:Current oscillation
5:Study current over limit
10:Output voltage over limit
20 E.TE1 Motor static self study
40:Study timeout
41:Parameter setting mistake
42:PG direction detection
abnormal
50:Rotor resistance study
abnormal
1:Write timeout
2:Read timeout
21 E.EEP EEPROM fault
3:Successive read and write
timeout
22 Reserved Reserved
23 E.BRU Breaking unit fault

26 E.CPE Parameter copy abnormal
Expansion card
27 E. PG
connecting abnormal
1:Hardware over-voltage
28 E.OU4 Over-voltage when stop
2:Software over-voltage
29 E.PID PID break fault
Keypad can not recognize 1:Change a keypad above KB20

30 LIFE
fault prompt 2:Check the prompt code by C-36
31 E.IAE Fail to study initial angle
159
32 E.DEF Speed deviation too large See FA.23

33 E.SPD Speed stall protection See FA.26
34 E.LD1 Overload protection1 See FA.17 ”0”digit
35 E.LD2 Overload protection2 See FA.17 ”000”digit
1:Main cycle timeout
36 E.CPU CPU counter timeout 2:1ms interrupt timeout
3:AD interrupt timeout
Pre alarm Code list
Communication
Fault display Fault name Fault diagnose（FA.39）
code
65 A.LIF Input phase loss
66 A.PID PID break fault
67 A.LD1 Overload protection1 See FA.17 ”0”digit
68 A.LD2 Overload protection2 See FA.17 ”000”digit
69 A.EEP EEPROM fault
70 A.DEF Speed deviation too large See FA.23
71 A.SPD Speed stall protection See FA.26
72 A.072 lock pre alarm
73 A.073 GPRS lock pre alarm
74 A.074 485communication alarm
Input Terminal on/off Diagram:
X1 term inalstate reserve

X2 term inalstate X7 term inalstate
stand forinputterm inals on stand forinputterm inals off

inputterm inals on oroffsketch m ap
Tip: C-31 monitoring expansion input D0~D5 connection diagrams are the same as the
diagram above, but only displaying the first six valid digits.
Output Terminal on/off Diagram:
160
Y term inalstate reserve

TA1/TC1/TB1 state reserve
TA2/TB2/TC2 state reserve
reserve reserve
stand foroutputterm inals on stand foroutputterm inals off

outputterm inals on oroffstate
Tip: C-31 monitoring expansion output D0~D5 connection diagrams are the same as the
diagram above, but only displaying the first six valid digits.
161
AC200 HIGH-PERFORMANCE VC INVERTER MANUAL Appendix
Chapter 10 Appendix
10.1 Appendix 1 Function Parameters Summary Table
“●”: Parameter can be changed in the running state.
“〇”: Parameter can’t be changed in the running state.
“×”: Parameter can be read only.
“–”: Factory setting parameter, only factory can set.
“※”: Parameter is related to the model.
Basic parameters
Function Range of settings and Factory Feat Addres
NO.
description definition default ure s
Asynchronous motor control

mode:
0: V/F control
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: High-performance VC without
PG
4: High-performance VC with
PG
F0.00 Motor control mode 0 〇 0x000
Synchronous motor control
mode:
5:Reserved
6: High-performance VC without
PG
7: VC with PG
Other control:
8:Voltage frequency differential
output
F0.01 Reserved 0x001
0: Keyboard control
1: Terminal control
Run command
F0.02 2: RS485 communication 0 ● 0x002
channel
control
3: Optional card
0: Keyboard number given
1: Keyboard potentiometer
Frequency given given
F0.03 0 ● 0x003
source channel A 2: Terminal VS voltage analog
given
3:Terminal AI analog given
4: Terminal AS analog given
Frequency given 5: Terminal pulse PUL given
F0.04 1 ● 0x004
source channel B 6: RS485 communication given
7: UP/DW control
162
8: PID control given

9: Program control (PLC) given
10: Optional card
11: Multi-steps speed given
0: Max. output frequency as
Frequency channel reference source
F0.05 0 ● 0x005
B reference source 1: A set frequency as reference
source
0: Channel A
1: Channel B
2: Channel A+Channel B
Frequency given 3: Channel A-Channel B
F0.06 0 ● 0x006
source selection 4: Max. value of Channel A and
Channel B
5: Min. value of Channel A and
Channel B
LED“0”digit: keyboard
command instruction binding
LED“00”digit: terminal
LED“000”digit: communication
LED“0000”digit: optional card
0 : no binding
1 : keyboard number given
frequency
2 : Keyboard potentiometer
Running command given
F0.07 0000 ● 0x007
binding 3 : Terminal VS voltage
4 : Terminal AI analog given
analog given
5 : Terminal AS current analog
given
6 : Terminal pulse PUL given
8 : Terminal UP/DW control
9 : PID control given
A: Program control (PLC) given
B: Optional card
C: Multi-speed given
D: Reserved
Keyboard number
F0.08 0～upper limit 50.00Hz ● 0x008
setting frequency
Max frequency
F0.09 upper limit～600.00Hz 50.00Hz 〇 0x009
output
163
0: Upper limit frequency digital

given
Upper limitation given
F0.10 0 ● 0x00A
source selection 2: Terminal VS analog given
3:Terminal AI analog given
4: Terminal AS analog given
5: Terminal pulse PUL given
Upper frequency 6: RS485
Lower communication port
frequency～max
F0.11 given 50.00Hz ● 0x00B
limit digital setting frequency
Lower frequency 7: Optional card
F0.12 0.00～frequency upper limit 0.00Hz ● 0x00C
limit
0: Stop output, enter into pause
Lower frequency
F0.13 running state 1 〇 0x00D
limit running mode
1: Run at lower frequency limit
Model
F0.14 ACC time 1 0.01-650.00s set ※ 0x00E
Model
F0.15 DEC time 1 0.01-650.00s ※ 0x00F
set
LED“0”digit: running
direction take the opposite
0: Direction unchanged
1: Direction take the opposite
LED“00”digit: running
direction prohibited
0:Forward and reverse
commands are allowed
Rotary direction
F0.16 1: Only forward command is 0000 〇 0x010
selection
allowed
2: Only reverse commands are
allowed
LED“000”digit: frequency
control direction selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid
LED“0000”digit: reserved
164
0: No action
1: Restore factory default (not
restoring motor parameters)
Parameter
F0.19 2: Restore factory default 0 ● 0x013
initialization
(restoring motor parameters)
3: Clear malfunction records
Remaining value: no operation
Run control parameters
NO.
description definition setting ure s
0: Start by start frequency
1: Braking first then start by start
Start-up mode
F1.00 frequency 0 〇 0x100
running
2: Speed tracking, judge
direction then start
Start pre-excitation
F1.01 0.00～60.00s 0.00s 〇 0x101
time
F1.02 Start frequency 0.00～60.00Hz 0.50Hz 〇 0x102
Start frequency hold
F1.03 0.0～50.0s 0.0s 〇 0x103
time
Braking current
F1.04 0.0～150.0% 60.0% 〇 0x104
before start
Braking time before
F1.05 0.0～60.0s 0.0s 〇 0x105
start
Speed tracking
F1.06 0.00～60.00s 0.50s 〇 0x106
speed
Speed tracking stop
F1.07 0.00～60.00s 1.00s 〇 0x107
delay
0: DEC stop
F1.10 Stop mode 0 ● 0x10A
1: Free stop
DC braking initial
F1.11 0.00～50.00Hz 1.00Hz 〇 0x10B
frequency
F1.12 DC braking current 0.0～150.0% 60.0% 0x10C
F1.13 Reserved 0x10D

DC braking holding
F1.14 0.0～60.0s 0.0s 〇 0x10E
time
Stop detection
F1.15 0.00～50.00Hz 0.50Hz ● 0x10F
frequency
165
LED “0” digit: time base

selection
0: max frequency
1: fixed frequency 50Hz
2: set frequency
F1.16 ACC/DEC selection 0010 〇 0x110
LED “00” digit: S ACC/DEC
selection
0: Beeline ACC/DEC
1: S Curve ACC/DEC
ACC start S curve LED “0000” digit: reserved
F1.17 0.00～10.00 0.10s 〇 0x111
time
ACC finish S curve
F1.18 0.00～10.00 0.10s 〇 0x112
time
DEC start S curve
F1.19 0.00～10.00 0.10s 〇 0x113
time
DEC finish S curve
F1.20 0.00～10.00 0.10s 〇 0x114
time
F1.21 ACC time 2 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x115
F1.22 DEC time 2 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x116
F1.23 ACC time 3 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x117
F1.24 DEC time 3 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x118
F1.25 ACC time 4 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x119
F1.26 DEC time 4 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x11A
F1.27 Emergency stop 0.01～650.00s 1.00s ● 0x11B
DEC time dead
FWD&REV
F1.28 0.0～120.0s 0.0s 〇 0x11C
time
Zero speed torque
F1.29 0.00～10.00Hz 0.50Hz ● 0x11D
frequency threshold
Zero speed torque
F1.30 coefficient 0.0～150.0% 60.0% ● 0x11E
Zero speed torque 0.0～6000.0s

F1.31 holding time If set 6000.0s, always hold 0 ● 0x11F
without time limit.
Power off restart 0: Invalid
F1.35 0 〇 0x123
action selection 1: Valid
F1.36 Power off restart 0.00～60.00s 0.50s 〇 0x124
waiting time
JOG running
F1.38 0.00-Max frequency 5.00Hz ● 0x126
frequency setting
166
F1.39 JOG ACC time 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x127

F1.40 JOG DEC time 0.01～650.00s 10.00s ● 0x128
F1.41 Jump frequency 1 0.00-Max frequency 0.00Hz ● 0x129
F1.42 Jump frequency 0.00-Max frequency 0.00Hz ● 0x12A

range 1
F1.43 Jump frequency 2 0.00-Max frequency 0.00Hz ● 0x12B
F1.44 Jump frequency 0.00-Max frequency 0.00Hz ● 0x12C

range 2
Quantum Digital Terminal Parameter Group
NO.
description definition setting ure s
0: No function
1: FWD
F2.0 Multifunction input 2: REV 1 〇 0x200
0 terminal 1(X1) 3: 3-line running control (Xi)
4: FWD JOG
5: REV JOG
6: Free stop
7: Emergency stop
8: Malfunction reset
9: External fault input
F2.0 Multifunction input
10: Frequency UP 2 〇 0x201
1 terminal 2(X2)
11: Frequency DW
12: UP/DW clear
13: Switch channel A to channel
B
14: Frequency channel
F2.0 Multifunction input combination switch to A
4 〇 0x202
2 terminal 3(X3) 15: Frequency channel
combination switch to B
16: Multispeed terminal 1
Multifunction input 19: Multispeed terminal 4
F2.03 20: PID control cancel 5 〇 0x203
terminal 4(X4)
21: PID control pause
22: PID characteristic switch
23: PID gain switch
167

Multifunction input 28: PID feedback switch 2
F2.04 29: PID feedback switch 3 6 〇 0x204
terminal 5(X5)
30: PLC pause
31: PLC restart
32: ACC/DEC time choose
terminal 1
33: ACC/DEC time choose
terminal 2
34: ACC/DEC pause
35: Swing frequency input
Multifunction input 36: Swing frequency pause
F2.05 8 〇 0x205
terminal 6(X6) 37: Swing frequency reset
38: Reserved
39: Reserved
40: Timer trigger terminal
41: Timer clear zero terminal
42: Timer clock input terminal
43: Counter clear terminal
44: DC braking order
45: Pre excitation order
terminals
Multifunction input 46: Motor selection terminal
F2.06 10 〇 0x206
terminal 7(X7/PUL) 47: Reserved
48: Command channel switch to
keyboard
terminal
communication
expansion card
52: Operation prohibited
53: Forward prohibited
54: Reverse prohibited
F2.07 Reserved 55: Reserved 0 〇 0x207
56: Reserved
57: Reserved
58: Reserved
59: Reserved
60: Speed torque control switch
61: Position control switch
62: Reserved
63: Reserved
168
0: On valid 1: Off valid

LED “0” digit: X1 terminal
X1-X4 terminal
F2.08 LED “00” digit: X2 terminal 0000 ● 0x208
feature selection
LED “0000” digit: X4terminal
0: On valid 1: Off valid
X5-X7 terminal
F2.09 LED “00” digit: X6 terminal 0000 ● 0x209
feature selection
LED “0000” digit::reserved
X1 valid detected
F2.10 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20A
delay
X1 invalid detected
F2.11 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20B
delay
X2 valid detected
F2.12 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20C
delay
X2 invalid detected
F2.13 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20D
delay
X3 valid detected
F2.14 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20E
delay
X3 invalid detected
F2.15 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x20F
delay
X4 valid detected
F2.16 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x210
delay
X4 invalid detected
F2.17 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x211
delay
X5 valid detected
F2.18 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x212
delay
X5 invalid detected
F2.19 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x213
delay
X6 valid detected
F2.20 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x214
delay
X6 invalid detected
F2.21 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x215
delay
X7 valid detected
F2.22 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x216
delay
X7 invalid detected
F2.23 0.000-6.000S 0.010 ● 0x217
delay
169
0: 2-line 1
Terminal control 1: 2-line 2
F2.26 0 〇 0x21A
running mode 2: 3-line 1
3: 3-line 2
0: OFF 1:ON
LED “0” digit: Terminal operate
protection when abnormal exit
LED “00” digit: Jog terminal
Terminal operate operate protection when
F2.27 0111 〇 0x21B
protection abnormal exit
LED “000” digit: Operate
protection when command
channel switch to terminal
F2.28 Reserved 〇 0x21C
F2.29 Reserved 〇 0x21D
PUL input min
F2.30 0.00-50.00kHz 0.00kHz ● 0x21E
frequency
PUL min frequency
F2.31 corresponding 0.00-100.00% 0.00% ● 0x21F
setting
PUL input max 50.00kH
F2.32 0.00-50.00kHz ● 0x220
frequency z
PUL max frequency
100.00
F2.33 corresponding 0.00-100.00% ● 0x221
%
setting
F2.34 PUL filter time 0.000s-9.000s 0.100s ● 0x222
PUL cut-off 0.010kH
F2.35 0.000-1.000kHz ● 0x223
frequency z
0: Off electricity storage
UP/DW terminal 1: Off electricity does not
F2.36 frequency control storage 0 〇 0x224
mode 2: Valid in running, clear zero at
stop
ACC/DEC speed of
0.50Hz/
F2.37 UP/DW terminal 0.01-50.00Hz/s ● 0x225
s
frequency
0: Second
F2.39 Timer time of unit 1: Minute 0 ● 0x227
2: Hour
F2.40 Timer setting value 0-65000 0 ● 0x228
F2.41 Counter max value 0-65000 1000 ● 0x229

170
Counter setting
F2.42 0-65000 500 ● 0x22A
value
F2.43 Reserved 0x22B
0: Positive 1: Negative
LED “0” digit: Terminal Y
LED “00” digit: Relay output
Output terminal
F2.44 terminal 1 0000 ● 0x22C
polarity selection
LED “000” digit: Relay output
terminal 2
0: No output
1: FWD Running
2: REV Running
3. Fault trip alarm 1(alarm when
fault
self-recover)
F2.45 Output terminal 1 1 ● 0x22D
4: Fault trip alarm 2(no alarm
when
fault self-recover)
5: Fault retrying
6: External fault stop
7: Under voltage
8: Finish ready for running
9: Output frequency level test
1(FDT1)
10: Output frequency level test
2(FDT2)
Relay output 1 11: Reaching given frequency
F2.46 4 ● 0x22E
12: running at 0 speed
13: Reaching upper frequency
limit
14: Reaching lower frequency
limit
15: Program running circle
period completed
16: Program running speed
completed
17: PID feedback exceeds
upper limit
F2.47 Relay output 2 18: PID feedback under lower 11 ● 0x22F
limit
19: PID feedback sensor wire
break
20: Reserved
21: Timer time arrived
171
22: Counter reaching biggest

value
23: Counter reaching setting
value
24: Dynamic braking
25: PG feedback break
26: Emergency stop
27: Pre alarm output for over
load
28: Pre alarm output for under
load
29: Motor overload pre alarm
30: RS485 given
31: Reserved
F2.48 Y1 output delay time 0.000-6.000s 0.010s ● 0x230
Relay 1 output delay
F2.49 0.000-6.000s 0.010s ● 0x231
time
Relay 2 output delay
F2.50 0.000-6.000s 0.010s ● 0x232
time
Output frequency
level 1（FDT1）
F2.52 FDT1 lag 0.00-Max frequency 1.00Hz ● 0x234
Output frequency
level 2（FDT2）
F2.54 FDT2 lag 0.00-Max frequency 1.00Hz ● 0x236
Given frequency
F2.55 0.00-50.00Hz 2.00Hz ● 0x237
arriving checkout
F2.56 range
Reserved 0x238
F2.58 Reserved 0x23A
Virtual vX1 terminal
F2.60 0 〇 0x23C
function selection
F2.61 0 〇 0x23D
function selection
See X terminal function input
F2.62 0 〇 0x23E
function selection
F2.63 0 〇 0x23F
function selection
172
0: internal connection with

virtual vYn
1: Connect with physical
vX terminal valid
F2.64 terminal Xn 0000 ● 0x240
state source
2: function code setting valid or
not
LED “0” digit: virtual vX1
0: invalid 1: valid
Virtual vX terminal LED “0” digit: virtual vX1
F2.65 function code LED “00” digit: virtual vX2 0000 ● 0x241
setting valid state LED “000” digit: virtual vX3
Virtual vY1 output
F2.66 0 ● 0x242
selection
Virtual vY2 output
F2.67 0 ● 0x243
selection
See Y terminal function output
F2.68 Virtual vY3 output
0 ● 0x244
selection
Virtual vY4 output
F2.69 0 ● 0x245
selection
F2.70 vY1 output delay 0.0s～6.000s 0.010S ● 0x246

Terminal input
F2.75 0 〇 0x24B
extend( D0)
Terminal input
F2.76 0 〇 0x24C
extend (D1)
Terminal input
F2.77 0 〇 0x24D
extend (D2) See X terminal function input
Terminal input See Y terminal function output
F2.78 0 〇 0x24E
extend (D3)
Terminal input
F2.79 0 〇 0x24F
extend (D4)
Terminal input
F2.80 0 〇 0x250
extend (D5)
0: Input 1: Output
D0-D2 terminal LED “0” digit:D0 terminal
F2.81 input and output LED “00” digit: D0 terminal 0000 ● 0x251
selection LED “000” digit: D0 terminal
173
0: Input 1: Output
D3-D5 terminal LED “0” digit:D3 terminal
F2.82 input and output LED “00” digit: D4 terminal 0000 ● 0x252
selection LED “000” digit: D5 terminal
0: ON valid 1: OFF valid

LED “0” digit:D0 terminal
D0-D2 terminal
F2.83 LED “00” digit: D0 terminal 0000 ● 0x253
feature selection
0: ON valid 1: OFF valid

LED “0” digit:D3 terminal
D3-D5 terminal
F2.84 LED “00” digit: D4 terminal 0000 ● 0x254
feature selection
LED “0” digit:D0,D1 terminal

0: invalid
1: D0,D1 as general I/O
2: D0/D1 as CAN pins
D0-D5 extended LED “00” digit: D2,D3,D4,D5
F2.85 board complex terminal 0000 ● 0x255
function selection 0: invalid
1: D2,D3,D4,D5 as general I/O
2: D3,D4,D5 as QEP pins
3: D2,D3,D4,D5 as SPI pins
D0-D5 valid LED “0000” digit: reserved
F2.86 0.000-6.000S 0.010S ● 0x256
detection delay
D0-D5 invalid
F2.87 0.000-6.000S 0.010S ● 0x257
detection delay
F2.88 D0-D5 output delay 0.000-6.000S 0.010S ● 0x258
F2.89-
Reserved
F2.98
Analog Terminal Parameter Group

Function Range of settings and Factory Feat Addre
NO.
description definition setting ure ss
F3.00 VS Lower limit 0.00-10.00V 0.00V ● 0x300
VS Lower limit
F3.01 -100.00-100.00% 0.00% ● 0x301
corresponding
F3.02 setting
VS upper limit 0.00-10.00V 10.00V ● 0x302
174
VS upper limit 100.00

F3.03 -100.00-100.00% ● 0x303
corresponding
%
F3.04 setting
VS filter time 0.00-6.00s 0.010s ● 0x304
VS zero point loop
F3.05 0.00-10.00V 0.00V ● 0x305
voltage
AI used as VS lower
F3.06 0.00-10.00V 0.00V ● 0x306
limit
AI (VS)lower limit
F3.07 0.00-100.00% 0.00% ● 0x307
corresponding
setting
AI used as VS upper
F3.08 0.00-10.00V 10.00V ● 0x308
limit
AI (VS)upper limit 100.00
%
setting
F3.10 AI filter time 0.00-6.00s 0.010s ● 0x30A
F3.11 AS lower limit 0.00-20.00mA 4.00mA ● 0x30B

AS lower limit
F3.12 0.00-100.00% 0.00% ● 0x30C
corresponding
setting
F3.13 AS upper limit 0.00-20.00mA 20.00m ● 0x30D
AS upper limit A
100.00
F3.14 corresponding 0.00-100.00% ● 0x30E
%
setting
F3.15 AS filter time 0.000-6.000s 0.010s ● 0x30F
AI used as AS lower
F3.16 0.00-20.00mA 4.00mA ● 0x310
limit
AI ( AS) lower limit
F3.17 0.00-100.00% 0.00% ● 0x311
corresponding
setting
AI used as AS lower 20.00m
F3.18 0.00-20.00mA ● 0x312
limit
AI ( AS) upper limit A
100.00
%
setting
Vs terminal function
F3.20 See X terminal function 0 〇 0x314
selection (used as X)
F3.21 AI high level setting 0.00-100.00% 70.00% ● 0x315
F3.22 AI low level setting 0.00-100.00% 30.00% ● 0x316
AI terminal function
F3.23 See X terminal function 0 〇 0x317
selection (used as X)
F3.24 AI high level setting 0.00～100.00% 70.00% ● 0x318
F3.25 AI low level setting 0.00～100.00% 30.00% ● 0x319
AS terminal function
F3.26 See X terminal function 0 〇 0x31A
selection（as X）
F3.27 AS high level setting 0.00～100.00% 70.00% ● 0x31B
175
F3.28 AS low level setting 0.00～100.00% 30.00% ● 0x31C

0: low level 1: high level
Valid state set when LED 0 digit: VS
F3.29 analog used as LED 00 digit: AI 0000 ● 0x31D
terminal LED 000 digit: AS
LED “0” digit: VS
0: Beeline (default)
1: curve 1
Analog input curve 2: curve 2
F3.30 0000 ● 0x31E
selection LED “00” digit: AI (Select voltage
or current input by wire jumper)
LED “000” digit: AS
LED “0000”digit: reserved
F3.31 Reserved 0x31F
F3.32 Curve 1 lower limit 0.00～10.00V 0.00V ● 0x320

Curve 1 lower limit
F3.33 corresponding 0.00～100.00% 0.0% ● 0x321
setting
Curve 1 inflection
F3.34 0.00～10.00V 3.00V ● 0x322
point 1 input voltage
Curve 1 inflection
F3.35 0.00～100.00% 30.00% ● 0x323
point 1
corresponding
Curve 1 inflection
F3.36 0.00～10.00V 6.00V ● 0x324
setting2 input voltage
point
Curve 1 inflection
F3.37 0.00～100.00% 60.00% ● 0x325
point 2
F3.38 corresponding
Curve 1 upper limit 0.00～10.00V 10.0V ● 0x326
setting
Curve 1 upper limit 100.00
F3.39 0.00～100.00% ● 0x327
corresponding
%
F3.40 setting2 lower limit
Curve 0.00～10.00V 0.00V ● 0x328
Curve 2 lower limit
F3.41 corresponding 0.00～100.00% 0.00% ● 0x329
setting
Curve 2 inflection
F3.42 0.00～10.00V 3.00V ● 0x32A
Curve 2 inflection
F3.43 0.00～100.00% 30.00% ● 0x32B
point 1
corresponding
Curve 2 inflection
F3.44 setting 0.00～10.00V 6.00V ● 0x32C
Curve 2 inflection
F3.45 0.00～100.00% 60.00% ● 0x32D
point 2
corresponding
F3.46 Curve 2 upper limit 0.00～10.00V 10.00V ● 0x32E
setting
176
Curve 2 upper limit 100.00

F3.47 0.00～100.00% ● 0x32F
corresponding
%
F3.48 setting
Reserved 0x330

LED “0” digit: AO1
0: 0～10V
1: 4.00～20.00mA
2: 0.00～20.00mA
LED “00” digit: A02
A0 output signal
F3.53 0: 0～10V 0000 ● 0x335
selection
1: 4.00～20.00mA
2: 0.00～20.00mA
3: FM frequency pulse output
0: Given frequency
F3.54 A01 output selection 1: Output frequency 0 ● 0x336
2: Output current
3: Input voltage
4: Output voltage
5: Machine speed
6: Given torque
7: Output torque
8: PID given value
9: PID feedback value
10: Output power
F3.55 A02 output selection 1 ● 0x337
11: Bus voltage
12: VS input value
13: AI input value
14: AS input value
15: PUL input value
16: Module temperature 1
17: Module temperature 2
18: RS485 given
F3.56 A01 output gain 25.0～200.0% 100.0% ● 0x338
F3.57 A01 output signal -10.0～10.0% 0.0% ● 0x339
F3.58 bias output filter
A01 0.000～6.000s 0.010s ● 0x33A
F3.59 AO2 output gain 25.0～200.0% 100.0% ● 0x33B
177
A02 analog output

F3.60 -10.0%～10.0% 0.0% ● 0x33C
signal bias
F3.61 A02 output filter 0.000～6.000s 0.010s ● 0x33D
A02FM frequency
F3.62 0.00～100.00kHz 0.20kHz ● 0x33E
output lower limit
A02FM frequency 50.00kH
F3.63 0.00～100.00kHz ● 0x33F
output upper limit
z
F3.64
Reserved
-F3.7
System Parameter Group
Function Range of settings and Factory Featu Addre
NO.
description definition setting re ss
0: Not locked
1: Function parameter locked
2: Function parameter and key
Parameter and key
F4.00 locked (except for 0 ● 0x400
lock selections
RUN/STOP/JOG)
3: All function parameter and
key locked
F4.01 User password 0～9999 0 ● 0x401

LCD keyboard
F4.04 0: Chinese 1: English 0 ● 0x404
language selection
0: No function
1: Send inverter parameters to
keyboard and save
F4.05 Parameter copy 0 〇 0x405
2: Send parameters to keyboard
and save
Remaining value: no operation
LED 0 digit: D\E monitor on
0: Off
1: On
LED 00 digit: no keyboard
potentiometer lock sampling
Keyboard special
F4.06 value 0000 〇 0x406
function selection
0: Off
1: On
178
F4.07 REV/JOG selection 0: REV 1: JOG 0 〇 0x407
0: Non-keyboard control mode

is invalid
F4.08 STOP key setting 1 〇 0x408
stop according to stop mode
stop according to free mode
LED “0” digit: keyboard

UN/DOWN key modify
selection
0: Invalid
1: Modify frequency setting by
key board numbers F0.08
2: Modify PID give setting by
key board numbers Fb.01
LED “00” digit: power down
save
UP/DOWN key
F4.09 0: No save after frequency 0011 〇 0x409
selection
power down
1: Save after frequency power
down
LED “000” digit: action limit
0: Operation stop for adjusting
1: Adjusting only in operation,
stop for holding
2: Adjusting in operation, stop
for clearing
Keyboard
F4.10 potentiometer lower 0.00～5.00V 0.50V ● 0x40A
limit
Keyboard
potentiometer lower
F4.11 0.00～100.00% 0.00 ● 0x40B
limit corresponding
setting
Keyboard
F4.12 potentiometer upper 0.00～5.00V 4.50V ● 0x40C
limit
Keyboard
potentiometer upper
F4.13 0.00～100.00% 100.00 ● 0x40D
limit corresponding
setting
The display content LED "0" and “10” digit:
F4.14 1101 ● 0x40E
of the first line in display the first group
179
running state 00～63

LED "100" and "1000" digit:
display the second group
00～63
display the third group
The display content
00～63
F4.15 of the first line in 0402 ● 0x40F
running state
display the fourth group
00～63
LED "0" and “10” digit:
display the first group
The display content
00～63
F4.16 of the first line in stop 1100 ● 0x410
state
00～63
The display content
00～63
F4.17 of the first line in stop 0402 ● 0x411
state
00～63
The display content
00～63
F4.18 of the second line in 0402 ● 0x412
running state
00～63
The display content
00～63
running state
00～63
The display content
00～63
stop state
00～63
The display content
00～63
stop state
00～63
180
LED “0” digit: output

frequency selection
0: Aim frequency
1: Running frequency
Keyboard display
F4.22 LED “000” digit: power 0000 ● 0x416
item setting
display dimension
0: Power display percentage
(%)
1: Power display kilowatt (KW)
LED “0” digit: C-00~C-39
0: Normal
1: Debug
LED“00” digit: C-40~69
0: No display
Reserved（debug
F4.23 1: Normal 0000 ● 0x417
monitor selection）
1: VF debug
2: VC debug
3: TUNE debug
LED“000”digit:reserved
Rotate speed display
F4.24 0.0～500.0% 100.0% ● 0x418
coefficient
Power display
F4.25 0.0～500.0% 100.0% ● 0x419
coefficient
LED “0” digit: E.EEP fault
(EEPROM store fault)
0: Alarm and free stop
F4.26 Alarm selection 1 1: Alarm and continue operation 0000 ● 0x41A
0：After power up the fan runs

1: Stop associated with
temperature, running is rotary
F4.28 Fan control 1 ● 0x41C
2: Running associated with
temperature, stop while the fan
stops
Dynamic braking
F4.29 0: Off 1: On 0 ● 0x41D
enabled
Dynamic braking
F4.30 115.0%～140.0% 125.0% ● 0x41E
voltage
181
Dynamic braking
F4.31 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ● 0x41F
utilization
PWM carrier Model

F4.32 0.7～16.0kHz ※ 0x420
frequency set
LED “0” digit: carrier

associated with temperature
0: Temperature independent
1: Temperature dependent
LED “00” digit: carrier
associated with output
frequency
0: Independent of output
frequency
1: Dependent on output
frequency
F4.33 PWM control mode 1111 ● 0x421
LED “000” digit: random PWM
valid
0: Prohibited
1: Valid
LED “0000” digit: PWM
modulation mode
0: Only use three-phase
modulation
1: Two-phase and three-phase
modulation automatically
switched
Motor Parameter Group

Function Range of settings and Factory Featu Addre
NO.
description definition default re ss
0: Asynchronous motors (AM)

F5.00 Motor mode 1: Permanent magnet 0 × 0x500
synchronous
182
motors (PM)
Number of motor
F5.01 2～98 4 〇 0x501
poles
Model
F5.02 Motor rated power 0.1～1000.0kW ※ 0x502
set
Motor rated Model

F5.03 0.01～max frequency ※ 0x503
frequency set
Model
F5.04 Motor rated speed 1～65000rpm ※ 0x504
set
Model
F5.05 Motor rated voltage 1～1500V ※ 0x505
set
Model
F5.06 Motor rated current 0.1～3000.0A ※ 0x506
set
Asynchronous motor Model

F5.07 0.1～3000.0A ※ 0x507
no-load current set

F5.08 0.01～50.00% ※ 0x508

F5.09 0.01～50.00% ※ 0x509
rotor resistance set
F5.10 stator leakage 0.01～50.00% ※ 0x50A
inductance set

F5.11 0.1～2000.0% ※ 0x50B
stator inductance set
synchronous motor Model

F5.12 0.01～50.00% ※ 0x50C
Synchronous
Model
F5.13 machine d axis 0.01～200.00% ※ 0x50D
set
inductance
Synchronous
Model
F5.14 machine q axis 0.01～200.00% ※ 0x50E
set
inductance
Synchronous Model
F5.15 1～1500V ※ 0x50F
machine back EMF set
Synchronous Model
F5.16 0.0°～360.0° ※ 0x510
machine encoder set
183
installation angle

0: No operation
Motor parameters
1: Rotary type self-study
F5.20 self-adjustment 0 〇 0x514
2: Static type self-study
selections
3: Reserved
LED “0” digit: closed-loop
vector
0: OFF
1: ON
2: On, only operate firstly when
Synchronous
electrify
F5.21 machine poles 0010 〇 0x515
LED “00” digit: open-loop
searching function
vector
0: OFF
1: ON
2: ON, only operate firstly when
electrify
F5.28 Reserved 0x51C
F5.29 Reserved 0x51D

LED “0” digit: encoder mode
0: Common ABZ encoder
1: Rotary encoder
LED “00” digit: encoder
direction
Speed feedback or 0: same direction
F5.30 0000 〇 0x51E
encoder mode 1: reverse direction
LED “000” digit: wire break
inspection
0: OFF
1: ON
LED“0000”digit:Z pulse
184
correction enabled
0: OFF
1: ON
F5.31 ABZ encoder lines 0-10000 1024 〇 0x51F
wire break inspection
F5.32 0.100-60.000s 2.000s ● 0x520
time
F5.33 Rotary encoder poles 2～128 2 〇 0x521
Numerator of
F5.34 encoder 1～32767 1 〇 0x522
transmission ratio
Denominator of
F5.35 encoder 1～32767 1 〇 0x523
transmission ratio
First-order filter of
F5.36 encoder speed 0.0～100.0ms 1.0ms ● 0x524
inspection
F5.37
-F5.4 Reserved
Motor VC Parameter Group

ASR(speed loop) 0x60
F6.00 0.01～100.00 10.00 ●
proportional gain 1 0
0x60
F6.01 ASR integral time 1 0.000～6.000s 0.500s ●
1
0x60
F6.02 ASR filter time1 0.0～100.0ms 0.0ms ●
2
ASR switch frequency 0x60
F6.03 0.00～Max frequency 0.00Hz ●
1 3
ASR (speed loop) 0x60
F6.04 0.01～100.00 10.00 ●
proportional gain 2 4
ASR (speed loop) 0x60
F6.05 0.000～6.000s 0.500s ●
integral time 2 5
0x60
F6.06 ASR filter time 2 0.0～100.0ms 0.0ms ●
6
ASR switch frequency 0x60
F6.07 0.00～Max frequency 5.00Hz ●
2 7
Electric motor torque 0x60

F6.08 0.0～250.0% 180.0% ●
limit 8
Power generation 0x60

F6.09 0.0～250.0% 180.0% ●
torque limit 9
185
Current loop D-axis 0x60

F6.10 0.001～4.000 1.000 ●
proportional gain A
Current loop D-axis 0x60
F6.11 0.001～4.000 1.000 ●
integral gain B
Current loop Q-axis 0x60
F6.12 0.001～4.000 1.000 ●
proportional gain C
Current loop Q-axis 0x60
F6.13 0.001～4.000 1.000 ●
integral gain D
0x60
F6.14 Reserved
E
Vector control motor 0x60
F6.15 0.0～250.0% 100.0% ●
slip compensation F
Vector control
0x61
F6.16 generator slip 0.0～250.0% 100.0% ●
0
compensation
Position compensation 0x61
F6.18 0:OFF 1:ON 0 ●
control 2
0x61
F6.19 compensation gain 0.0～250.0% 10.0% ●
3
0x61
F6.20 compensation limit 0.0～100.0% 0.1% ●
4
compensation effective 0x61
F6.21 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ●
range 5
Over excitation braking 0x61
F6.22 0.0～500.0% 100.0% ●
gain 6
Over excitation braking 0x61
F6.23 0.0～250.0% 100.0% ●
amplitude limit 7
Vector control energy 0x61
F6.24 0:OFF 1:ON 0 ●
saving function 8
Energy saving control 0x61
F6.25 0.0～80.0% 50.0% ●
gain 9
Energy saving control 0x61
F6.26 0.000～6.000s 0.010s ●
low-pass filter A
Motor constant power 0x61
F6.27 0.0～250.0% 150.0% ●
area power limit B
Motor weak magnetic 0x61
F6.28 0.0～250.0% 60.0% ●
current upper limit C
F6.29 0.0～200.0% 0.0% ●
feed forward gain D
F6.30 0.0～500.0% 100.0% ●
gain E
0x61
F6.31 Reserved
F
186
0x62
F6.32 MTPA gain 0.0～400.0% 100.0% ●
0
0x62
F6.33 MTPA filter time 0.0～100.0ms 1.0ms ●
1
0x62
F6.34 Reserved
2
Low frequency pull in 0x62
F6.35 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ●
current 3
High frequency pull in 0x62
F6.36 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ●
current 5
Frequency of current 0x62
F6.37 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ●
pulled in 5
F6.38
-F6.6 Reserved
Torque Control Parameter

Fe
Function Range of settings and Factory Addr
NO. atu
description definition default ess
re
0:Speed control 0x70
F7.00 Torque/Speed control 0 ●
1:Torque control 0
0: keyboard number given
setting
2: Analog VS
Torque given 0x70
F7.01 3: Analog AI 0 ●
channels selection 1
4: Analog AS
5: Pulse PUL
7: Optional card
Torque keyboard 0x70
F7.02 0～100.0% 0.0% ●
number setting 2
Torque input lower 0x70
F7.03 0～100.00% 0.00% ●
limit 3
Lower limit
0x70
F7.04 corresponding -200.00%～200.00% 0.00% ●
4
setting
Torque input upper 0x70
F7.05 0～100.00% 100.00% ●
limit 5
Upper limit
0x70
F7.06 corresponding -200.00%～200.00% 100.00% ●
6
setting
Given first-order filter 0x70
F7.07 0.000～6.000S 0.100S ●
time 7
187
Output torque upper 0x70

F7.08 0～200.0% 150.0% ●
limit 8
Output torque lower 0x70
F7.09 0～200.0% 0% ●
limit 9
0: function code F7.12setting
setting×7.12
2: Analog VS×F7.12
Torque control FWD 3: Analog AI×F7.12 0x70
F7.10 0 ●
speed limit selection 4: Analog AS×F7.12 A
5: Pulse PUL×F7.12
6: RS485 communication
given×F7.12
7: Optional card×F7.12
0: function code F7.13 setting
setting×F7.13
2: Analog VS×F7.13
Torque control REV 3: Analog AI×F7.13 0x70
F7.11 0 ●
speed limit selection 4: Analog AS×F7.13 B
5: Pulse PUL×F7.13
6: RS485 communication
given×F7.13
7: Optional card×F7.13
Torque control FWD 0x70
F7.12 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
speed limit C
Torque control REV 0x70
F7.13 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
speed limit D
0x70
F7.14 Reversed
E
Motor V/F Control Parameter

Fe
NO. atu
re
0: Beeline VF curve
1-9: 1.1-1.9 idempotent VF
Linear VF curve 0x80
F8.00 curve respectively 0 〇
selection 0
10: square VF curve
11: self-defined V/F curve
Self-setting voltage 0x80

F8.01 0.0～100.0% 3.0% 〇
V1 1
Self-setting
F8.02 0.00-max frequency 1.00Hz 〇 0x80
frequency F1
188

F8.03 0.0～100.0% 28.0% 〇
V2 3
Self-setting 0x80
F8.04 0.00-max frequency 10.00Hz 〇
frequency F2 4

F8.05 0.0～100.0% 55.0% 〇
V3 5
Self-setting 0x80
frequency F3 6

F8.07 0.0～100.0% 78.0% 〇
V4 7
Self-setting 0x80
frequency F4 8

F8.09 0.0～100.0% 100.0% 〇
V5 9
Self-setting 0x80
frequency F5 A
Output voltage 0x80

F8.11 25.0～120.0% 100.0% 〇
percentage B
0x80
F8.12 Torque boost 0.0～30.0% 0.0% ●
C
Torque boost cut-off 0x80

F8.13 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
frequency D
Slip compensation 0x80

F8.14 0.0～200.0% 100.0% ●
gain E

F8.15 0.0～300.0% 100.0% ●
limit F

F8.16 0.000～6.000s 0.200s ●
filter time 0
Surge suppression 0x81

F8.17 0.0～900.0% 100.0% ●
gain 1
189
0x81
F8.18 Reserved
2
Auto energy saving 0: Off 0x81

F8.19 0 〇
control 1: On 3
Energy saving 0x81

F8.20 0.0～50.00Hz 15.00Hz 〇
frequency lower limit 4
Energy saving 0x81

F8.21 20.0～100.0% 50.0% 〇
voltage lower limit 5
Energy saving 0.010V/M 0x81

F8.22 voltage regulation 0.000～0.200V/MS ●
S 6
rate
Energy saving 0.200V/M 0x81

F8.23 0.000～2.000V/MS ●
voltage recovery rate S 7
0x81
F8.24 Reserved
8
0x81
F8.25 Reserved
9
0x81
F8.26 Reserved
A
0x81
F8.27 Reserved
B
0x81
F8.28 Reserved
C
0x81
F8.29 Reserved
D
0: function code F8.31 setting
given
Output voltage 2: Analog VS given
source of 3: Analog AI given 0x81
F8.30 0 ●
voltage-frequency 4: Analog AS given E
separation 5: Pulse PUL given
6: PID output given
7:RS485 communication given
8: Optional card
190
Output voltage of
voltage-frequency 0x81
F8.31 0.0～100.0% 0.0% ●
separation number F
setting
Output voltage of 0x82
F8.32 voltage-frequency 0.0～100.00s 10.00s ●
0
separation ACC time
Output voltage of 0x82
F8.33 voltage-frequency 0.0～100.00s 10.00s ●
1
separation DEC time
0: Output voltage and frequency
Voltage-frequency ACC/DEC no interaction 0x82
F8.34 separation stop 1: Output voltage down to 0V, 0 ●
2
model then output frequency start to
decrease
F8.35-F
Reserved
8.38
Protection and Malfunction Parameter Group

Fe
NO. atu
re
0: Suppression valid 0xA0
OC suppression
FA.00 1: ACC/DEC valid, constant 0 ●
function 0
speed invalid
OC suppression 0xA0
FA.01 0.0 ～ 300.0% 160.0% ●
point 1
0xA0
FA.02 OC suppression gain 0.0 ～ 500.0% 100.0% ●
2
LED “0” digit: (CBC)

0: Off 1: On
LED “00” digit: OC protection
disturbing suppression
Current hardware 0xA0
FA.03 0: Off 0001 〇
protection settings 3
1: First grade disturbing
suppression
2: Second grade disturbing
suppression
191
LED “000” digit: SC protection

First grade disturbing
suppression
0: Off
1: First grade disturbing
suppression
2: Second grade disturbing
suppression
0xA0
FA.04 Reserved
4
Bus over voltage 0: Off 0xA0

FA.05 1 〇
hardware protection 1: On 5
LED “0” digit: Over voltage

suppression control
0: Prohibited
1: Valid in DEC
Bus over voltage 2: Valid both in ACC/DEC 0xA0
FA.06 suppression LED “00” digit: Overexcitation 0012 〇
6
protection control
0: Off
1: On
Bus over voltage 0xA0

FA.07 110.0 ～ 150.0% 128.0% ※
suppression point 7
Bus over voltage 0xA0

FA.08 0.0 ～ 500.0% 100.0% ●
suppression gain 8
Bus under voltage 0: Prohibited 0xA0

FA.09 0 〇
suppression function 1: Valid 9
Bus under voltage 0xA0

FA.10 60.0 ～ 90.0% 80.0% ※
suppression point A

FA.11 0.0 ～ 500.0% 100.0% ●
suppression gain B

FA.12 60.0 ～ 90.0% 60.0% ※
protection point C
192
0xA0
FA.13 Reserved
D
Short-circuit 0xA0
0: Off
FA.14 detection after power 0 〇
1: On E
up to ground
LED “0” digit: Output loss
phase protection
0: Off
1: On
LED “00” digit: Input loss 0xA0
FA.15 phase protection 0011 〇
Loss phase protect F
0: Off
1: Open the alarm
2: Open the fault
Motor overload 0xA1
FA.16 protection curve 0.0～250.0% 100.0% 〇
0
coefficient
LED “0” digit: Detection
selection (protection 1)
0: Not detected
2: Detected load is too large only
at constant speed
4: Insufficient load only at
constant speed
LED “00” digit: Alarm
Load pre alarm selection 0xA1
FA.17 0000 〇
detection setting 0: Alarm and continue operation 1
selection (protection 2)
0: Not detected
2: Detected load is too large only
at constant speed
4: Insufficient load only at
constant speed
193

selection
Load pre alarm 0xA1

FA.18 0.0～200.0% 130.0% 〇
detection level 1 2
Load pre alarm 0xA1

FA.19 0.0～60.0s 5.0s 〇
detection time 1 3
Load pre alarm 0xA1

FA.20 0.0～200.0% 30.0% 〇
detection level 2 4
Load pre alarm 0xA1

FA.21 0.0～60.0s 5.0s 〇
detection time 2 5
0xA1
FA.22 Reserved
6

selection
0: Not detected
Protection action 2: Detecting 0xA1
FA.23 when speed slip is LED “00” digit: Alarm 0000 〇
7
too large selection
detection threshold 0xA1
FA.24 when speed slip is 0.0～60.0% 10.0% 〇
8
too large
detection time when 0xA1
FA.25 speed slip is too 0.0～60.0s 2.0s 〇
9
large
selection
0: Not detected 0xA1
Rapid protection
FA.26 1: Detected at constant speed 0000 〇
action A
2: Detecting
selection
194

Rapid detection 0xA1

FA.27 0.0～150.0% 110.0% 〇
threshold B
0xA1
FA.28 Rapid detection time 0.000～2.000s 0.010s 〇
C
0xA1
FA.29 Reserved
D
0xA1
FA.30 Reserved
E
0xA1
FA.31 Reserved
F
0xA2
FA.32 Reserved
0
0xA2
FA.33 Reserved
1
0xA2
FA.34 Reserved
2
0xA2
FA.35 Reserved
3
0xA2
FA.36 Reserved
4
Malfunction 0xA2
FA.37 0～5 0 〇
self-recovery times 5
Malfunction 0xA2
FA.38 0.1～100.0s 1.0s 〇
self-recovery interval 6
Malfunction 0xA2
FA.39 See fault information code table -- ×
diagnosis information 7
195
0xA2
FA.40 Malfunction types See fault information code table -- ×
8
Malfunction running 0xA2

FA.41 0.00～Max frequency -- ×
frequency 9
Malfunction output 0xA2

FA.42 0～1500V -- ×
voltage A

FA.43 0.1～2000.0A -- ×
current B
Malfunction bus 0xA2

FA.44 0～3000V -- ×
voltage C
Malfunction module 0xA2

FA.45 0～100℃ -- ×
temperature D
LED “0” digit: Running

direction
0: FWD
1: REV
Malfunction machine status 0xA2
FA.46 -- ×
state 0: Stop E
1: ACC
2: DEC
3：Constant speed
Malfunction input 0xA2

FA.47 See input terminal chart -- ×
terminal status F

FA.48 See output terminal chart -- ×
terminal status 0
The last malfunction Please see malfunction code 0xA3

FA.49 -- ×
types table 1
The last malfunction 0xA3

FA.50 0.00～Max frequency -- ×
running frequency 2

FA.51 0～1500V -- ×
output voltage 3
196

FA.52 0.1～2000.0A -- ×
output current 4

FA.53 0～3000V -- ×
bus voltage 5

FA.54 0～100℃ -- ×
module temperature 6

direction
0: FWD
1: REV
status 0xA3
FA.55 The last machine -- ×
0: Stop 7
state
1: Constant speed
2: ACC
3: DEC

FA.56 See input terminal chart -- ×
input terminal state 8

FA.57 See output terminal chart -- ×
output terminal state 9
The first two Please see malfunction code 0xA3

FA.58 -- ×
malfunction types table A
The first three Please see malfunction code 0xA3

FA.59 -- ×
malfunction types table B
PID Process Control Parameter Group

Fe
NO. atu
re
0: Keyboard digit PID given
1: Keyboard potentiometer given 0xB0
PID controller given
Fb.00 2 :Terminal VS voltage analog 0 ●
signal source 0
given
3: Terminal AI voltage and
197
current analog given

4: Terminal AS current analog
given
7: Optional card
8: Terminal selection
Keyboard digit PID 0xB0

Fb.01 0.00～100.0% 50.0% ●
given/feedback 1
PID given changing 0xB0

Fb.02 0.00～60.00s 1.00s ●
time 2
0: Keyboard digit PID given

1: Keyboard potentiometer given
2 :Terminal VS voltage analog
given
3: Terminal AI voltage and
PID controller 0xB0
current analog given
Fb.03 feedback signal 2 ●
4: Terminal AS current analog 3
source
given
7: Optional card
8: Terminal selection
Feedback signal filter 0xB0

Fb.04 0.000～6.000s 0.010s ●
time 4
0xB0
Fb.05 Feedback signal gain 0.00～10.00 1.00 ●
5
Given and feedback 0xB0

Fb.06 0～100.0 100.0 ●
range 6
LED “0”digit: Feedback

feature selection
0: Positive feature
1: Negative feature
LED “00”digit: Reserved 0xB0
Fb.07 PID control selection 0100 ●
LED “000”digit: Reserved 7
LED “0000”digit: Differential
adjustment properties
0 : Differential of deviation
1 : Differential of feedback
198
0xB0
Fb.08 PID preset output 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
8
PID preset output 0xB0

Fb.09 0.0～6500.0s 0.0s ●
running time 9
PID control deviation 0xB0

Fb.10 0.0～100.0% 0.0% ●
limit A
0xB0
Fb.11 Proportional gain P1 0.000～8.000 0.100 ●
B
0xB0
Fb.12 Integral time I1 0.0～600.0s 1.0s ●
C
0xB0
Fb.13 Differential gain D1 0.000～6.000s 0.000s ●
D
0xB0
Fb.14 Proportional gain P2 0.000～8.000 0.100 ●
E
0xB0
Fb.15 Integral time I2 0.0～600.0s 1.0s ●
F
0xB1
Fb.16 Differential gain D2 0.000～6.000s 0.000s ●
0
0: Not switch 0xB1

PID parameter
Fb.17 1: Use DI terminal to switch 0 ●
switching condition 1
2: Switch according to deviation
Low value of 0xB1
Fb.18 switching deviation 0.0～100.0% 20.0% ●
2
High value of 0xB1

Fb.19 switching deviation 0.0～100.0% 80.0% ●
3
0xB1
Fb.20 Reserved
4
0xB1
Fb.21 Differential limit 0.0～100.0% 5.0% ●
5
PID output upper 0xB1

Fb.22 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
limit 6
Fb.23 PID output lower limit -100.0～Fb.19 0.0% ● 0xB1
199
0xB1
Fb.24 PID output filter time 0.000～6.000s 0.000s ●
8
Feedback wire break 0xB1

Fb.25 0.0～120.0s 1.0s ●
detection time 9
0: Go on PID operation without
alarm
1: Stop and alarm malfunction 0xB1
Feedback wire break
Fb.26 2: Go on PID operation and 0 ●
action selection A
output alarm signal
3: Run at the current frequency
and output alarm signal
Wire break alarm 0xB1

Fb.27 0.0～100.0% 100.0% ●
upper limit B
Wire break alarm 0xB1

Fb.28 0.0～100.0% 0.0% ●
lower limit C
Closed-loop suspend 0xB1
Fb.29 detection threshold 0.0～100.0% 0.0% ●
D
Closed-loop suspend 0xB1
Fb.30 detection time 0.0～600.0s 1.0s ●
E
0xB1
Fb.31 Reserved
F
Multi-Speed and PLC Function Parameter Group

Fe
NO. atu
re
0xC0
FC.00 PLC Speed 1 0.00～Max frequency 10.00Hz ●
0
0.00～Max frequency 0xC0
FC.01 PLC Speed 2 20.00Hz ●
1
2
FC.03 PLC Speed 4 0.00～Max frequency 40.00Hz ● 0xC0
200
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
201
LED “0” digit: cycle mode

0: Stop after single cycle
1: Continuous cycles
2: Keep final value after single
cycle
LED “00” digit: Time unit
0: second
1: minute
PLC running 2: hour 0xC0
FC.15 mode LED “000” digit: Power down 0000 ●
selection memory mode F
0: not saved
1: save
LED “0000” digit:Start-up
mode
0: Restart from the 1st stage
1: Restart from the stop stage
2: Continue from the time when
stop
PLC 1st Step running 0xC1

FC.16 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 0
PLC 2nd Step 0xC1

FC.17 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time 1
PLC 3rd Step 0xC1

FC.18 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time 2
PLC 4th Step running 0xC1

FC.19 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 3

FC.20 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 4

FC.21 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 5

FC.22 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 6

FC.23 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 7

FC.24 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
time 8
PLC 10th Step
FC.25 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ● 0xC1
running time
202
PLC 11th Step 0xC1

FC.26 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time A
PLC 12th Step 0xC1

FC.27 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time B
PLC 13th Step 0xC1

FC.28 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time C
PLC 14th Step 0xC1

FC.29 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time D
PLC 15th Step 0xC1

FC.30 0.0～6500.0(s/m/h) 10.0 ●
running time E
PLC 1st Step 0xC1
FC.31 direction and 0000 ●
ADD/DEC time F
PLC 2nd Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time 0
PLC 3rd Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time 1
PLC 4th Step 0xC2
FC.34 direction and LED “0” digit: this step run 0000 ●
ADD/DEC time direction 2
0: FWD
PLC 5th Step 0xC2
1: REV
FC.35 direction and LED “00” digit: ACC/DEC time 0000 ●
ADD/DEC time 3
in this step
PLC 6th Step 0: ACC/DEC time 1
0xC2
FC.36 direction and 1: ACC/DEC time 2 0000 ●
2: ACC/DEC time 3 4
ADD/DEC time
4: ACC/DEC time 4
PLC 7th Step LED “000” digit: reserved 0xC2
FC.37 direction and LED “0000” digit: reserved 0000 ●
ADD/DEC time 5
PLC 8th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time 6
PLC 9th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time 7
PLC 10th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time 8
203
PLC 11th Step 0xC2

ADD/DEC time 9
PLC 12th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time A
PLC 13th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time B
PLC 14th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time C
PLC 15th Step 0xC2
ADD/DEC time D
0xC2
FC.46 Reserved
E
0xC2
FC.47 Reserved
F
0xC3
FC.48 Reserved
0
Swing frequency 0xC3

FC.49 0: invalid 1:valid 0 ●
control 1
Swing frequency 0:Relative to center frequency 0xC3

FC.50 0 ●
amplitude control 1:Relative to max frequency 2
0xC3
FC.51 Reserved
3

FC.52 0.0～100.0% 10.0% ●
amplitude 4
Jump frequency 0xC3

FC.53 0.0～50.0% 10.0% ●
amplitude 5

FC.54 0.00～650.00s 5.00s ●
rising time 6

FC.55 0.00～650.00s 5.00s ●
falling time 7
FC.56 Reserved 0xC3
204
Communication Control Function Parameter Group

Fe
NO. atu
re
LED “0” digit: Modbus
main-slave machine selection
0: Main machine 0xD0
Main-slave machine
Fd.00 1: Slave machine 0000 〇
selection 0
485 communication 0xD0

Fd.01 1～247 1 〇
address 1
LED “0” digit: 485

communication
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps 0xD0
Communication baud
Fd.02 3: 9600 bps 0003 〇
rate selection 2
4: 19200 bps
5: 38400 bps
0: (N,8,1) no checkout,
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 1
1: (E,8,1) even checkout,
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 1
2: (O,8,1) odd checkout,
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 1 0xD0
Fd.03 Modbus data format 0 〇
3: (N,8,2) no checkout, 3
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 2
4: (E,8,2) even checkout,
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 2
5: (O,8,2) odd checkout,
Data digit: 8,
Stop digit: 2
Communication ratio
Fd.04 0.00～5.00 1.00 ● 0xD0
setting
205
4
Modbus 0xD0
Fd.05 communication 0～500ms 0ms ●
answer delay 5
Modbus 0xD0
Fd.06 communication 0.1～100.0s 1.0s ●
overtime fault time 6
Modbus 0: No checkout overtime fault

communication fault 1: Alarm and stop freely 0xD0
Fd.07 0 ●
action mode 2: Alarm, go on running 7
selection 3: Forced outage
0: Write operation with response 0xD0

Modbus transmission
Fd.08 1: Write operation without 0 ●
response dispose 8
response
LED“0”digit: the first group
transmitting frame selection
0: Invalid
1: Main machine run command
2: Main machine given
frequency
3: Main machine output
frequency
4: Main machine upper limit
frequency
5: Main machine given torque
6: Main machine output torque
7: Torque control FWD speed
limit
8: Torque control REV speed
Main machine limit 0xD0
Fd.09 0031 ●
sending selection 9: Main machine given PID 9
A: Main machine feedback PID
B: Reserved
LED ”00” digit: the second
group transmitting frame
selection
Same as above
LED “000” digit: the third
selection
Same as above
LED “0000” digit: the fourth
selection
Same as above
206
RS485 0: Modbus communication 0xD0

Fd.10 communication port 1: serial ports communication 0 ●
configuration 2: reserved A
Fd.11 Reserved 0xD0B
Fd.12 Reserved 0xD0C
Fd.13 Reserved 0xD0D
LAN 1st level

Fd.14 Setting range: 0～9999 0 ● 0xD0E
address
LAN 2nd level
Fd.15 Setting range: 0～9999 0 ● 0xD0F
address
207
Monitor Code
Access ‘C’ parameter group by pressing ‘PRG’ for more than 2s; check out the current state of
inverter.
Range of settings and
NO. Function name Address
definition
C-00 Given frequency 0.01Hz 2100H
C-01 Output frequency 0.01Hz 2101H
C-02 Output current 0.1A 2102H
C-03 Input voltage 0.1V 2103H
C-04 Output voltage 0.1V 2104H
C-05 Machine speed 1RPM 2105H
C-06 Given torque 0.1% 2106H
C-07 Output torque 0.1% 2107H
C-08 PID given value 0.1% 2108H
C-09 PID feedback value 0.1% 2109H
C-10 Output power 0.1% 210AH
C-11 Bus voltage 0.1V 210BH
C-12 Module temperature 1 0.1℃ 210CH
C-13 Module temperature 2 0.1℃ 210DH
Input terminal X on
C-14 See input terminal diagram 210EH
state
Output terminal Y on See output terminal
C-15 210FH
state diagram
C-16 Analog VS input value 0.001V 2110H
C-17 Analog AI input value 0.001V/0.001mA 2111H
C-18 Analog AS input value 0.001mA 2112H
Impulse signal PUL
C-19 0.001kHz 2113H
input
C-20 Analog output AO1 0.01V 2114H
C-21 Analog output AO2 0.01V/0.01mA/0.01kHz 2115H
Counting value of
C-22 2116H
counter
Running time after
C-23 0.1h 2117H
electrifying
Local accumulative
C-24 Hour 2118H
running time
C-25 Inverter power class kW 2119H
C-26 Inverter rated voltage V 211AH
C-27 Inverter rated current A 211BH
C-28 Software version 211CH
PG feedback
C-29 0.01Hz 211DH
frequency
208
Extended terminal
C-30 See input terminal diagram 211EH
input state
Extended terminal See output terminal
C-31 211FH
output state diagram
C-32 Reserved 2120H
C-33 Reserved 2121H
C-34 Reserved 2122H

C-35 Counted time of timer sec/min/h 2123H
C-36 Fault pre alarm code 2124H
Total power
C-37 consumption (low 1° 2125H
position)
Total power
C-38 consumption (high 10000° 2126H
position)
C-39 Power factor angle 1° 2127H
209
10.2 Appendix 2: Modbus Communication Protocol

●Introduction
The AC200 series frequency inverter is equipped with the RS485 communication interface and
the ModBus communication protocol of international standard is adopted for master-slave
communication. Users can realize centralized control by PC/PLC, upper machine, master station
frequency inverter etc (Setting of the frequency inverter control command, running frequency,
relative function parameters modification, frequency inverter working state and malfunction
information monitoring etc.) to adapt to specific application requirements.
● Application Methods
1. AC200 series frequency inverter is connected to “single host and multi slave machines” control
network with RS485 master line. Slave machine do not response when host machine order with
broadcast (slave machine address is 0).
2. AC200 only provides RS485 interface, asynchronous half-duplex. When the communication
interface of the external equipment is RS232, RS232/RS485 converter should be added.
3. This ModBus serial communication protocol defines the asynchronous transfer information
content and formats used in the serial communication, which can be divided into RUT and ASCII
mode. AC100 is RTU（remote terminal unit）mode.
● Communication Frame Structure
Communication data format is as follows:
The byte composition: Including initiation bit, 8 data bit, check bit and stop bit.
Sto
Initiation Chec
Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 p
Bit k bit
bit
One frame message must be transmitted as a continued data flow, and if there is a interval over 1.5
byte before ending, the receiving equipment will clear the half-baked information. And the next byte
will be considered as the address field of a new frame. Similarly, if the interval between a new
frame start-up and the former frame is smaller than 3.5 byte time, the receiving equipment will
consider that it is the continuation of former one frame. Since the jumbled frame, the final CRC
checking value is incorrect, which would lead to the communication mistake.
Standard Structure of RTU Frame:
Frame Start Transmission time of 3.5 bytes
Communication address:
Slave machine address
0～247（decimal）（0 is the broadcast address）
03H: read slave machine parameter
Command code 06H: write slave machine parameter
08H: circuit auto-detection
parameter address, parameter number, parameter
Data area
values
CRC CHK low-order
Detecting value: 16 bit CRC checking value
CRC CHK high-order
Frame ending transmission time of 3.5 bytes
In RTU mode, it always begins with transmission time pause gap of at least 3.5 bytes. The
successive order of the following transmission data domains: slave machine address、operation
command code, data and CRC checking word. Transmission byte of each domain is hexadecimal
210
0...9, A...F. Network equipment detects the network bus unceasingly, including the pause gap time.
When receiving the first domain (address information), each network equipment would carry out
decoding to judge whether the byte is sent to itself. When the final byte transmission is completed,
there will be an at least 3.5 bytes transmission time pause gap to indicate that this frame is over.
Then a new information transmission can start.
RTU DATA FRAM E FO RM AT
M O DBUS M ESSAG E
There is atlowest3.5 bytes slave m achine There is atlowest3.5 bytes

function code data checking
vacancy atbeginning address vacancy atending
● Command Code and Communication Data Description
Command code: 03 H, read N words (Word), continuously read 20 words at most.

For example：The frequency inverter whose slave machine address is 01 H, memory initial address
is 2100H [(C-00]), read continuously 3 words, then the structure of that frame is described as
follows:
RTU host machine command information
START Transmission time of 3.5 bytes
Slave machine address 01H
Command code 03H
Start address high-order 21H
Start address low-order 00H
Data number high-order 00H
Data number low-order 03H
CRC CHK low-order 0FH
CRC CHK high-order F7H
END Transmission time of 3.5 bytes
RTU Slave Machine Responding Information（normal）
Command code 03H
Byte number low-order 06H
Data address 2100H high-order 13H
Data address 2100H low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order 90H
CRC CHK high-order A6H
Slave Machine Responding Information（abnormal）
211
Command code 83H

Error code 04H
CRC CHK high-order F3H
Command code: 06H, write a word (Word)

Function: write a word data in the designated data address. It can be used to revise the frequency
inverter parameters.
For instance: 5000 (1388 H) is written into the 3000H address of slave frequency inverter with
address 1. Then the structure of this frame is described as follows:
RTU Host Machine Order Information
Command code 06H
Write data address high-order 30H
Write data address low-order 00H
Data content high-order 13H
Data content low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order 8BH
CRC CHK high-order 9CH
EBD Transmission time of 3.5 bytes
Command code 06H
Write data address high-order 30H
Write data address low-order 00H
Data content high-order 13H
Data content low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order 8BH
CRC CHK high-order 9CH
EBD Transmission time of 3.5 bytes
RTU Slave Machine Responding Information（abnormal）
Command code 86H
Error code 01H
CRC CHK high-order A0H
Command code: 08H, circuit auto-detection
Function: Send back the responding information of slave machine which is identical with the host
212
machine command information. It is used to check whether the signal transmission between the
host machine and slave machine is normal or not. The checking code and the data can be set
freely.
RTU Host Machine Command Information
Command code 08H
Detecting code high-order 00H
Detecting code low-order 00H
Data high-order 13H
Data low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order EDH
CRC CHK high-order 5DH
Command code 08H
Detecting code high-order 00H
Detecting code low-order 00H
Data high-order 13H
Data low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order EDH
CRC CHK high-order 5DH
RTU Slave Machine Responding Information（abnormal）
slave machine address 01H
Command code 88H
Error code 03H
CRC CHK high-order 01H
Communication frame error check mode
The standard MODBUS serial network adopts two kinds of error check mode: odd/even checking
which is used to check every character and CRC detecting which is used to check one frame data.
1. Odd-even Checking
Users can configure the controller with odd or even checking, or no checking, which will affect the
setting of odd/even checking in every character.
If odd /even checking has been specified, "1" bit will be accounted to the bit number of each
character (7 bits in ASCII mode, 8 bits in RTU). For instance, the RTU character frame contains the
following 8 bits: 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
213
There are 4 bits with number"1". If using the even checking, odd/even checking bit of the frame will
be 0, then there are still 4 bits with number"1". If using odd checking, odd/even checking bit of the
frame will be 1, then there are 5 bits with number"1".
If odd/even checking has not been specified, there will be no checking bit during the transmission,
and no checking detection. One additional stop bit will be filled into the character frame in
transmission.
2. CRC-16（cyclic redundancy checking）
When the RTU frame form in use; the frame has included the frame error detecting domain which
calculates base on the CRC method. The CRC domain checks the content of the entire frame. The
CRC domain is two bytes, containing binary values of 16 bits. It is added to the frame after
calculated by the transmission equipment. The receiving equipment calculates CRC who receives
frame again, and compares it with the value of the receiving CRC domain. If both CRC value are
not equal, it means the transmission is wrong.
CRC is firstly stored in 0xFFFF. Then a program is used to process the continuous 6 or above
bytes in the frame and the value of current registers. Only 8 Bit in every character is valid to CRC.
Start bit, stop bit and parity check bit are invalid.
In the producing process of CRC, each 8 characters independently XOR with register content. The
result moves to the lowest effective bit, and then the highest effective bit is filled by “1”. LSB is
extracted to be detected. If LSB is 1, the register independently XOR with the present value; If LSB
is 0, XOR is not needed. This entire process needs to repeat for 8 times. After the last bit (the
eighth bit) is accomplished, next 8 bits byte will independently XOR with register content. All the
final bytes in the frame are CRC value after processing.
This CRC calculation method adopts the international standard CRC checking rule. Users can
consult the relevant standard CRC operation when editing the CRC algorithm to compile required
CRC calculation program.
Now here provide the user a simple CRC operation function ( C language programming):
unsigned int crc _ chk_ value(unsigned char *data_ value, unsigned char length)
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while(length--)
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value&0x0001)
{
crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
214
return(crc_value);
}
●Communication Data Address Definition
This part is about the address definition of communication data, used to control the frequency
inverter running and obtain the mode information and relevant function parameter setting of the
frequency inverter.
(1)AC200 Series Function Parameter Address Expressing Rules
Take the frequency inverter function parameter serial numbers as the register address which are
divided into the high byte and the low byte. The high byte represents the function parameter group
serial numbers. The low byte represents the inner serial numbers of each function parameter group.
All need to be changed to hexadecimal.
High byte definition of address domain:
Parameter Code No Head Address of This Group Parameter
0x0000（not saved in to EEPROM）
F0 basic parameter group
0x1000（saved in to EEPROM）
F1 running control parameter 0x0100（not saved in to EEPROM）
group 0x1100（saved in to EEPROM）
F2 quantum digital terminal 0x0200（not saved in to EEPROM）
parameter group 0x1200（saved in to EEPROM）
F3 quantum analog terminal 0x0300（not saved in to EEPROM）
F4 keyboard and display 0x0400（not saved in to EEPROM）
F5 motor parameter group
F6 VC control parameter group
F7 torque control parameter
F8 V/F control parameter group
F9 reserved
FA malfunction protection 0x0A00（not saved in to EEPROM）
parameter group 0x1A00（saved in to EEPROM）
0x0B00（not saved in to EEPROM）
Fb PID control parameter group
0x1B00（saved in to EEPROM）
FC multi-speed. PLC function and 0x0C00（not saved in to EEPROM）
swing frequency parameter group 0x1C00（saved in to EEPROM）
Fd communication control 0x0D00（not saved in to EEPROM）
parameter group 0x1D00（saved in to EEPROM）
0x0E00（not saved in to EEPROM）
FE reserved
0x1E00（saved in to EEPROM）
0x0F00（not saved in to EEPROM）
FF reserved
0x1F00（saved in to EEPROM）
215
C monitor parameter group 0x2100

Communication control parameter
0x3000 or 0x2000
group
Note: since it is inevitable that the parameters are frequently rewritten during the
communication, the lifetime of EEPROM would be shortened if frequently stored. As for the
users, some functions are unnecessary to store in the communication mode, only changing
the value of RAM inner value can satisfy the required use. When AC200 communication
protocol stipulates to use writing command (06 H), if the parameter function code address
domain’s highest digit is 0, it only write in the RAM of the frequency inverter, and power
down without storage; if the parameter function code address high half digit is 1, it write in
EEPROM, which means power off storage.
For instance, when rewriting the function parameter [F0.14], if not depositing to EEPROM, address
expresses for 000EH; if depositing to EEPROM, address expresses for 100EH.
(2)Communication Control Parameter Group Address Specification:
R/W
Function Address
Data Meaning Specification Characteris
Specification Definition
tic
Communication 0x3000 or 0～32000 is corresponding to
W/R
Given Frequency 0x2000 0.00Hz～320.00Hz
0000H: No order
0001H: FWD running
0002H: REV running
0003H: FWD jog
Communication 0x3001 or 0004H: REV jog
W/R
Order Setting 0x2001 0005H: speed-down stop
0006H: freely stop
0007H: malfunction reset
0008H: Running forbidden command
0009H: Running allowed command
Bit0 0: stop 1:running
0:non-accelerating
Bit1 1: ACC
state
0x3002 or Bit2 0:non-decelerating 1: DEC
State of Inverter R
0x2002 Bit3 0: Forward 1: REV
Bit4 0: normal 1: fault
Bit5 0: GPRS unlocked 1:GPRS locked
Bit6 0: non-warning 1: warning
Frequency Inverter 0x3003 or current inverter fault code（refer to fault code
R
Fault Code 0x2003 table）
Communication
0x3004 or 0～32000
Given Upper W/R
0x2004 is corresponding to 0.00Hz～320.00Hz
Frequency
Communication 0x3005 or
0～1000 is corresponding to 0.0～100.0% W/R
Given Torque 0x2005
216
Setting
Communication
Given Max
0x3006 or
Frequency in 0～1000 is corresponding to 0.0～100.0% W/R
0x2006
Torque Control
FWD
Communication
Given Max 0x3007 or
Frequency in 0x2007
Torque Control REV
Communication 0x3008 or
Given PID Setting 0x2008
Communication
0x3009 or
Given PID 0～1000 is corresponding to 0.0～100.0% W/R
0x2009
Feedback
Voltage Frequency
0x300A or
separation voltage 0～1000 is corresponding to 0.0～100.0% W/R
0x200A
value setting
Fault and warning 0x3010 or 0-63 is the fault code
R
code reading 0x2010 64- is the warning code
External borrowing inverter output terminal
Output terminal 0x3010 or BII0 -- Y
R
state 0x2010 BIT1 -- TA1-TB1-TC1;
BIT2 -- TA2-TB2-TC2
0x3021 or
AO1 output 0-10000 corresponds output 0-10V,0-20mA R
0x2021
0x3022 or 0-10000 corresponds output

AO2 output R
0x2022 0-10V,0-20mA,0-50kHz
List of fault code meanings for abnormal response information from salve machine:
Fault Code Meanings
1 Order code fault
2 Reserved
3 CRC checking fault
4 Illegal address
5 Illegal data
6 Unable to modify when running
7 Reserved
8 Inverter busy（EEPROM is storing）
9 Value over limit
10 Reserved parameters can’t be modify
11 Number of Bytes wrong when reading
217
218
10.3 Appendix 3: PG card manual

1. Summarize
AC200 PG feedback card is mainly used for VC frequency inverter (AC200 series) feedback of
motor speed and direction detection signal to achieve higher accuracy of motor speed and
direction control.Please choose PG card according to the corresponded encoder.
2. Types and selections of PG card
Products consist of incremental encoder PG and rotary transformer PG. Encoder input signal type
and feedback card output signal type as follows;
Support input signal Type of PG output Suitable motor type
Type
type signal;
1.Difference signal 1.Open collector circuit
input input(frequency division
Incremental 2.Open collector / no division)
AM/PM
encoder PG circuit input 2.Difference signal
3.Push-pull signal output(frequency
input division / no division)
Rotary transformer Rotary transformer
None AM/PM
PG signal input
3. Order model
Instructions of order model
Ordering Notice
（1）Generally,the power supply of domestic encoder is 5V or 12V, and of aboard encoder is 5V.
Please select appropriate power according to the encoder type.
（2）Resolution ratio，the number of output pulse per circle when encoder operates;Must meet the
accuracy requirement of design and use. Please select the fractional frequency function according
to the pulse signal receiving frequency.
217
（3）Select the PG card output signal receiving device according to the occasion requirement ,for
example, monitoring equipment PLC choose output OC type. The other special equipment with anti
interference demand could select differential output type.
Note：
（1）The recommended ordering model of incremental encoder PG card is
PG01-ABZ-05-C1.Please refer to the ordering notice if you have the other requirements.
（2）The recommended ordering model of rotary encoder PG card is PG01-RT.Please refer to the
ordering notice if you have the other requirements.
4. Incremental encoder PG instruction

4.1 product technical parameter
Characteristic of input Characteristic of output

Output
Power Respond Input Output
Input signal frequency
frequency range resistance current
range
1-open
AB Z 0～300KHz collector circuit
5V/12V±5 output:0～
About
% 80KHz ≤100mA
1000Ω
200mA UVW 0～100KHz 2-Difference
signal output:
0～300KHz
4.2 Terminals function instruction
Terminals array of incremental encoder as follows:
4.3 Main signal terminals function instruction
Terminal Terminal
Instruction
definition name
5/12V Support maximum current output 200mA
Power
PE Ground
Common
COM Power earth
terminal
Difference output A +signal(reused as A signal while open collector
OA+
circuit output)
Output
OA- Difference output A -signal
side of PG
Difference output B+ signal(reused as B signal while open collector
OB+
circuit output)
218
OB- Difference output B-signal

OZ+ Difference output Z+ signal
OZ- Difference output Z-signal
A+ Encoder difference A signal input(push-pull and open collector circuit
A- output both compatible)
B+ Encoder difference B signal input(push-pull and open collector circuit

B- output both compatible)
Z+ Encoder difference Z signal input(push-pull and open collector circuit

Z- output both compatible)
Input side
U+ Encoder difference U signal input(push-pull and open collector circuit
of encoder
U- output both compatible)
V+ Encoder difference V signal input(push-pull and open collector circuit
V- output both compatible)
W+ Encoder difference W signal input(push-pull and open collector
W- circuit output both compatible)
1 .Input signals of A+,A-,B+,B- are two group orthogonal pulse. A group consists of opposite signals
named A+ and A-. B group consists of opposite signals named B+ and B-.And both are
orthogonal .Function is the same as open collector circuit and push-pull encoder.
2. Input terminal named Z+, Z- are zero position signals. Encoder will give one group of Z signals
every circle.
3.Input signals named U+,U-,V+,V-,W+,W- are PM position detecting signals .Both of three groups
have 120°angle.
Note: Terminals named OA+, OB- are reused as open collector circuit encoder input signals.
But both used at the same time is forbidden
4.4 Switch terminals instruction
Switch terminals are 8 bits used as PG division frequency ratio. Ratio of division frequency is equal
to 2 multiply binary system number what switch terminals stand for. When switch ON means invalid,
expressed as”1”, OFF means valid,expressed as “0”. Examples as follows
fo=fi
Selection
terminals when
CON4
used as division
frequency
fo=fi/2
219
fo=fi/4
fo=fi/6
fo=fi/508
fo=fi/510
4.5 Related parameters

Please set parameters according to what you need. Related parameters as follows.
Function code Name
F0.00 Control mode
F5. 30 Speed feedback or encoder
F5. 31 type
Numbers of pulse every
circle
4.6 Note of connection
1, Signal cable should be separated from power cable, and parallel lines are forbidden.
2, Please select shielded cable used as signal wires in case of interference.
3, Encoder shielded cable should best connect to earth alone in case of interference.
4.7 Wiring 1
220
L1 L2 L3
R S T
U+ U- V+ V- W+ W-
PG01-ABZ-05-C1
A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- PE
U V W
Monitor device
PG
M
3~
4.8 Application wiring
Differential output encoder wiring
OC output encoder wiring
221
Push-pull output encoder wiring
5. Rotary transformer PG instruction

5.1 Function instruction
Output signals of rotary transformer are two phase orthogonal analog signals. Voltage of them is
changing as sine and cosine curve following angle. Frequency is the same as exciting frequency
Speed signalputput
Rotary
transform er
PG 01-RT
Position digitalsignaloutput
Exciting power
5.2 Instruction of terminals function

Terminals array of rotary transformer PG as follows:
5.3 Main terminals instruction
Terminals definition Terminals name Instruction

PE Earth
output EXC+ Driving source output
EXC- Driving source output
COS+
Cosine signals input
COS-
input
SIN+
Sine signals input
SIN-
Waves below includes rotary transformer driving source, sine and cosine feedback.Enveloping
lines of sine and cosine have the same frequency as exciting frequency
222
5.4 Wiring
L1 L2 L3
R S T
PG01-RT
U V W
PG
M
3~
5.5 Note of connection

1, Signal cable should be separated from power cable, and parallel lines are forbidden
2, Please select shielded cable used as signal wires in case of interference .
3, Encoder shielded cable should best connect to earth （or the PE terminal of inverter）,best
single-ended earthing , in case of interference.
6. Installation size
6.1 Installation show
223
6.2 Installation size
5 97
75 16
29,5
37
84
224
10.4 Appendix 4: DP card manual

1. Profibus-DP card installation
Before installing please make sure switch off power supply, and wait until the power supply
indicators LED is off. Porifbus-PD card embed to inside of inverter, where under the removable
cover. See Fig. 1-1.
Fig.1-1 Profibus-DP card installation method

2. Profibus-DP card I/O describe
2.1 Product models describe
Product
Product describe Detail
model
AC200 standard Profibus-DP extension
ACDP03 5V±5% / specific interface
card
24V±10%/out-sourcing
ACDP04 General Profibus-DP extension card
connection line
2.2 Products connection schematic diagram
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
6 6
1 1
Fig. 2-1 ACDP03 connection Fig. 2-2 ACDP04 connection

1: Profibus-DP connector
2: Inside terminal resistor selecting slide switch
3: Indicator LED D1
4: Indicator LED D2
5: Profibus-DP slaver address slide switch
6: Ports of ACDP03 communication with AC100
225
7：Ports of ACDP04 with Slaver equipment

3.Wiring
Profibus-DP adopts RS-485 physical transmission method. Please wiring with Profibus-DP
standard cable to ensure communication system stable and reliable. The relationship of the
transmission rate selecting of Profibus-DP standard cable between allowable maximum length as
diagram showing:
Diagram Profibus-DP standard cable selecting transmission rate relationship with allowable
maximum length
Bus speed rate 9.6 19.2 93.75 187.5 500 1500 6000 12000
cable A（m） 1200 1200 1200 1000 400 200 100 100
cable B（m） 1200 1200 1200 600 200 100 100 100
Profibus-DP standard connector, Fig 3-1.
Profibus-DP
DB9 connector
PIN
Terminals
offset
terminal
switch
Profibus-DP
cable
connector
terminals
Fig 3-1, Profibus-DP standard connector
When configure PLC as Profibus-DP master, connect with 3 variable frequency inverter as slave
devices as show Fig 3-2.
Fig 3-2 connection diagram

Note:
1. Please use multimeter to check PIN 3 (A data cable) of every connector of Probibus-DP
connection is ON or not, and PIN 8( B data cable) is ON or not. Place terminal offset resistor
switch of both connecting connector to ON position (Or slide terminal switch of DP card for ON),
Place terminal offset resistor switch of both connecting connector to OFF position (or slide
terminal switch of DP card for OFF), please check resistor between data cable A and data cable
B, it should be 110 Ω around.
2. Please make a good solution for anti interference. To avoid place cable of communication
226
parallel with power cable, ensure the cover of slave device and shield layer of communication
cable share the same grounding. Ensure the E grounding terminal of DP card has good
connecting with grounding terminals of VFD.
3. The maximum slots is 10, the setting number can’t over this setting.
4. GSD document is available in the website: www.veichi.com
227
10.5 Appendix 5: LCD keyboard manual

1. Function characteristic
LCD keyboard is designed for user checking function parameters more directly. Language of LCD
keyboard is Chinese, and is compatible with other LED keyboards designed by our company.
It can display two monitoring parameters at the same time when inverter stops or runs.
States of running, stop and fault all have vivid image that makes user to understand and remember
states of inverter more conveniently.
It also has parameter copy and download functions, and can download parameters of same series
inverter .It is convenient for user to change batch parameters
Potentiometer is also on the keyboard and used for changing given frequency
Note:
1. If special type inverter needs LCD keyboard, please contact with our company.
2. User must confirm that type of LCD keyboard and type of inverter are suited.
Software version of LCD Type of inverters

KB10B AC70
KB30B AC80B
KB50B AC80C
KB70B AC100
KB90B AC200
2. Monitor menu
Chart 1 (a) at stop state Chart1 (b) at FWD running state Chart1 (c) at REV
running state
Chart1 (d) at JOG FWD state Chart1 (e) at JOG REV state
It can display two monitoring parameters and running or stop status every state of inverter, details
refer to chart 1.User can select first -line monitoring parameters by ,and select second-line
monitoring parameters by .（Allowed to choose one of the fourth setting parameters）.
3. Shortcut menu
Chart 2 Shortcut menu

Please press key long time to go into shortcut menu as chart 2.And user can check
parameters by or key, pressing or key to return back.
228
4. Parameters menu
(1) First level menu
Chart 3 first level menu Chart 4 second level menu

Press key into first level menu, and it can display three parameters. User can select anyone
of them by press or key. Press key to return back. Pressing key means selecting
the item, and then return back.
(2) Second level menu
When using AC80 series in the first level menu, press key to go into second level
menu.When using AC60 series in main menu, press key to go into menu. It displays first
level menu items in firs line, and displays second level menu items in second and third line.
Position of cursor is factory default setting. Press key to replace items, Press or key to
move cursor, Press key to return, Pressing key means selecting the item, and then return
back.
(3) Third level menu
Chart 5 (a) changing line Chart5 (b) data Chart 5 (c)

group
After going into second level menu, press key to go into third level menu. Third level menu
includes three kinds, changing line, data and group.
Changing line: First line displays second level menu items, second and third line display third level
menu items, and position of cursor is factory default setting ,details refer to chart5(a)
Press key to replace items
Press or to move cursor
Press to return back
Press to select item, and then return back.
Data: First line displays second level menu items, and second line displays data ,details refer to
chart 5(b)
Press to replace items
Press or to increase or decrease data while pressing , Press or to increase
or decrease data from lowest bit without pressing
Press to return back.
Press to confirm modifying data, and then return back .
Group: First line displays second level menu items, second line displays group number, and third
line displays third level menu items, details refer to chart 5(c)
Press to change another group, Press or to change items,
Press key to return back.
Press to confirm modifying items, and then return back.
If pressing or cannot modify items in third level menu, and display ”Read only” all that
229
remind user of parameter is not allowed to modify or when inverter is running ,modifying is
forbidden
5. Fault
Chart 6 (a) fault Chart 6 (b) fault reason

Fault: First line displays fault icon shiny, second line displays fault code and name, and third line
reminds user of pressing to check fault reasons, details refer to chart 6(a). Press to
go into fault reason. Press to reset fault when fault has been cleared
Fault reason: First line displays fault icon, code and name shiny, other lines display reasons,
details please refer to chart 6(b).If there up or down arrows, please press or to change
another page to check reasons; Press or to return back
6. Terminal state
Chart 7 (a) input terminal Chart 7 (b) output terminal

Input terminal: details please refer to chart (a), first line displays “Input terminal state”,and second
and third lines display the status of X1~X8 input terminal.
Output terminal: details please refer to char7 (b),first line displays “Output terminal state”,and
second and third lines display the status of relay and Y1/Y2 output terminal.
Note: If monitoring items are both terminal state in both lines, it will displays input terminal firstly.
7. Parameters copy
Chart8 (a) copying Chart8 (b) copy complete Chart8 (c)

copy fault
Chart8 (d) download Chart8 (e) download complete Chart8 (f)

download fault
Parameter copy: details please refer to chart 8 (a),8(b),8(c)
Please set F4.05=1 and select item “sending to keyboard from inverter”, and then press to
enter the copy function.When it displays “ copy is over”, it means finishing copy operation details
refer to chart 8(b).When it displays ”copy fault” ,it means operation is failed, details please refer to
230
chart 8(c).Press key to return .

Download: same as copy
Note: Inverters must be the same series, when downloading parameters
8. Self -tuning
Chart 9 (a) waiting Chart9 (b) resting type self-tuning
Chart 9 (c) rotary type self-tuning Chart 9(d) exciting magnetic detecting
Static self-tuning: steps as chart 9 (a),(b)and(d).Please set F5.12=2,and press key to go into
motor detecting waiting menu, details refer to chart 9(a).Then press key, and it will display
“Static self-tuning”, details refer to 9(b),It displays “exciting detecting” when self-tuning is over,
details refer to chart 9(d), then it will return back automatically.
Rotary self-tuning: steps as chart 9 (a), (c) and (d). Please set F5.12=1,and press key to go
into motor detecting waiting menu, details refer to chart 9(a).Then press key, and it will
display resting self-tuning, details refer to 9(b), while resting self-tuning is over, it displays “rotary
self-tuning”, details refer to chart9(c),After rotary self-tuning over, it displays “exciting detecting”,
details refer to chart 9(d), then it will return back automatically.
9. Other menus
Chart 10 (a) keyboard locked Chart10 (b) low voltage Chart 10 (c) model
of inverter
Keyboard locked: as chart 10(a).Keyboard will display locked menu when going into next menu,
after user setting password and selecting parameter locked function. Please type correct password
and then press key to go into next menu.
Low voltage: as chart10 (b).When input voltage is low, it will display this warning.
Model of inverter, as chart10(c).When power on, if communication is ok, it will display this menu,
and if not, it will display keyboard connection fault.
231
10.6 Appendix VI: CAN Card Manual

CANopen communication expansion card has the following characteristics:
1, support the heartbeat protocol, the master can use this function to query the device status;
2,there’re 2 send PDO channels and 2 receive PDO channels supporting PDO synchronous
transmission type;
3, SDO only supports expedited transfer mechanism with a maximum transmission of 4 bytes;
4, TPDO, RPDO, SDO and other communications objects COB-ID are associated with the device
ID, set within the software without modification when using;
5, does not support emergency objects, electrical parameters of CANopen communication comply
with international standards.
1. Installation of CANOPEN Card
CANOPEN card is embedded in the inverter and be sure to disconnect the power supply before
installation. Installation is shown as below:
CANOPEN Card Installation Mode
2. CANOPEN Card Interface Specification
4
3 1
2
Product Interface
Mark 1: CANOPEN card interface terminal, from left to right CANG, PE, CANH, CANL;
Mark 2: The internal terminal resistor selection slide switch;
Mark 3: Connect to the inverter earth selection slide switch;
Mark 4: CANOPEN card and AC200 inverter interfaces;
3. CANOPEN Connection Mode
CANopen wiring mode of VEICHI inverter needs expansion card CAN01. Connector is the way of
232
terminal, and 120Ω termination resistor must be added at the beginning and the end of the whole
serial network,; shielded twisted pair wire or special CAN communication lines should be used;
wiring as shown below:
4. CANOPEN card control drive mode

the control of the drive through CANOPEN can be implemented according to the following
steps (example. AC200).
1) wiring connection (reference CANopen wiring).
2) Set running command channel: drive parameter setting F0.02 = 3 (optional card).
3) Set frequency Source: drive parameter setting F0.03 = 10 (optional card).
4) Set the CANopen station: CANOPEN protocoll can be set by the drive parameters Fd.11 = 0,
Fd.12 set CANopen station number (range 1-127, 0 is the Disable CANopen slave function).
5) Set CANopen rate: the rate can be set via the LED “00” of CANopen drive parameters Fd.02.
CANOPEN communication control parameter group address description:
Sub R/W
Function Index Data specification
index features
0x203
Communicat 0 0～32000
ion given or 0x01 Corresponding to W/R
frequency 0x202 0.00Hz～320.00Hz
0
0000H: no order
0001H: FWD running
0x203 0002H: REV running
Communicat
0
ion 0003H: FWD JOG
or 0x02 W/R
command 0004H: REV JOG
0x202
setting
0 0005H: DEC to stop
0006H: free stop
0007H:fault reset
Inverter 0x203 Bit0 0: stop 1:running

0 0x03 R
state Bit1 0: Not ACC 1: ACC
or
0x202 233
0
Bit2 0: Not DEC 1: DEC

Bit3 0: FWD 1: REV
Bit4 0:Normal 1:Fault
Bit5 0:GPRS 1:GPRS
unlocked locked
Bit6 0: non-warning 1:warning
0x203
0
Inverter fault
or 0x04 Current fault code(see fault code list) R
code
0x202
0
Communicat 0x203
ion given 0 0～32000
upper or 0x05 corresponding to W/R
frequency 0x202 0.00Hz～320.00Hz
limit 0
0x203
Communicat 0
0～1000 corresponding to
ion torque or 0x06 W/R
0.0～100.0%
setting 0x202
0
Torque 0x203
control FWD 0
Max or 0x07 W/R
0.0～100.0%
frequency 0x202
limit 0
Torque 0x203
control REV 0
Max or 0x08 W/R
0.0～100.0%
frequency 0x202
limit 0
0x203
Communicat 0
ion given or 0x09 W/R
0.0～100.0%
PID setting 0x202
0
0x203
Communicat
0
ion given 0～1000 corresponding to
or 0x0A W/R
PID 0.0～100.0%
0x202
feedback
0
Voltage 0x203
frequency 0 0～1000 corresponding to
0x0B W/R
differential or 0.0～100.0%
voltage 0x202
234
setting 0
5. CANopen Supporting Index List

Parameter index Group. member is regular corresponding; as follows：
Index = 2000H + Group
Sub index= member+1
Example: setting for F3.22.
Group -member
F3 (F3H) - 22(16H)
Index = 2000H + 03H = 2003H
Sub Index = 16H + 1H = 17H
AC200 corresponding parameters:
Function code CanOpen Index and Sub-index
F0.00 --- F0.19 0x2000.0x01 --- 0x2000.0x14
F1.00 --- F1.44 0x2001.0x01 --- 0x2001.0x2D
F2.00 --- F2.98 0x2002.0x01 --- 0x2001.0x63
F3.00 --- F3.79 0x2003.0x01 --- 0x2003.0x50
F4.00 --- F4.37 0x2004.0x01 --- 0x2004.0x26

F5.00 --- F5.49 0x2005.0x01 --- 0x2005.0x32
F6.00 --- F6.69 0x2006.0x01 --- 0x2006.0x46
F7.00 --- F7.14 0x2007.0x01 --- 0x2007.0x0F
F8.00 --- F8.38 0x2008.0x01 --- 0x2008.0x27
F9.00 --- F9.79 0x2009.0x01 --- 0x2009.0x50
FA.00 --- FA.59 0x200A.0x01 --- 0x200A.0x3C
FB.00 --- FB.31 0x200B.0x01 --- 0x200B.0x20
FC.00 --- FC.56 0x200C.0x01 --- 0x200C.0x39
FD.00 --- FD.15 0x200D.0x01 --- 0x200D.0x10
C-01 --- C-39 0x2021.0x01 --- 0x2021.0x28
Communication control parameter 0x2030.0x01 --- 0x2030.0x0C
address
235

Ac200 Manual v1 0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ac200 Manual v1 0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ac200 Manual v1 0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

Danger: Wrong operation may cause death or large accident.

Warning: Wrong operation may cause death or large accident.

Caution: Wrong operation may cause minor wound.

Warning signs position Warning 1

Drawing 1：Warning positions on crust of AC200 series inverter

●Correct transport, store, installation and careful operation an maintenance are

1.2 Technical criterion

Single phase 220V 50/60Hz

Inrush current Lower than rated current

Power factor ≥0.94(with DC reactor)

Output under rated condition:3 phase, 0 ～ input voltage,

Modulate mode Optimized SVPWM mode

Main Steady speed VC without PG: ≤2% rated synchronized speed

Rely on power supply voltage compensate function, while motor

Auto energy-saving According to load situation, auto-optimize output voltage to save

PID control, speed track, power off restart, jump frequency,

Keyboard digital set, keyboard potentionmeter, analog voltage

Indoor,altitude ≤ 1000m,above 1000m down the rated amount,

-10 ～ +50℃，above 40℃ down the rated amount,the maximum

Table 1-1: Technical criterion

Chapter 2 Before Use

Drawing2-1：AC200 Series Inverter Nameplate Position

Drawing 2-2：Meaning and Naming Rules of AC200 Series Inverter Nameplate

2.3 Inverter Rated Output Current

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.2 Dealing Methods for Inverter after Long-term Storage

Chart 3-1: Dealing Methods for Inverter after Long-term Storage

● Inverter must be installed vertically and longitudinally, and it can’t be installed

PERM IT O UTPUT CURRENT(% )

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 TEM PERATURE(℃)

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 ALTITUDE(M ）

unscreened wires are as short as possible.

Chart 3-4: Multi AC200 Series Inverters United Earth

Chart 3-5：AC200 Series Inverter System Earth

Chart 3-6：Cable Earth Card for Cable Earth

Carrier frequency 0.7~16kHz 0.7~8kHz 0.7~4kHz 0.7~2kHz

3.5 Machinery Installation

Chart 3-7：AC200 Series Inverter Components

Chart 3-8：AC200 Series Inverter Installation Direction

Chart 3-9：Single AC200 Series Inverter Installation Space

AC200-S2-R75G 122 112 182 171 154.5 145 ф5

AC200-T3-018G 230 208 330 315 200 190 ф7

AC200-T3-030G 255 410 225 370 180 395 Ф7

Notice: DC Reactor Inside

Chart 3-3：AC200 Series Inverter Overall Dimension

Keyboard Shape and Mouth Dimension

Installation and Dismantlement of Tail-hood

Installation: First the tail-hood upwardly inclines around 15

Dismantlement: At the tail of the frequency inverter, there’s a

Installation and Dismantlement of keyboard

Chart 3-17:AC200 Series Inverter Keyboard Installation and Dismantlement

3.6 Electrical Installation

Standard Connection Diagram

(reversal running) X2 TB1

passive terminal output

open collector output

shielded twisted pair line) J3 K6

current model analog input A02